Please read surely the following precautions.

Please read surely the following precautions.
Safety precautions
Be sure to read carefully and thoroughly this Manual with other attached documents before installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of the Inverter so as to use it correctly. Please use the Inverter after the acquirement of all of knowledge on the equipment, safety information and the matters to be attended.
In this Manual, the rank of safety precautions are classified into DANGER and CAUTION.

DANGERCAUTION: Misoperation could result in dangerous situation and in death or heavy injury.

: Misoperation could result in dangerous situation and in medium/minor injuries, and in damage to thematerials only but there is a possibility that misoperation may cause serious result depending on thecondition.
As all cautions include important contents, be sure to follow them thoroughly.

CAUTION [as to installation]
Mount the Inverter on the noninflammable material such as metal, etc.
There is a fear of fire.
Don't put the inflammable material near to the Inverter.
There is a fear of fire.
Don't take front cover at the time of carrying.
There is a fear of injury by dropping.
Install the Inverter at endurable place against weight.
There is a fear of injury by dropping.
Don't install and operate damaged Inverter, or Inverter of which parts are omitted.
There is a fear of injury.

DANGER [as to wiring]
Make wiring after confirmation of OFF of input power source.
There is a fear of electric shock and fire.
Connect earth wire surely.
There is a fear of electric shock and fire.
Wiring work should be done by persons specialized in electric engineering work.
There is a fear of electric shock and fire.
Make wiring surely after installation of main body.
There is a fear of electric shock and fire.

CAUTION [as to wiring]
Never connect AC power source to output terminals (U, V, W).
There is a fear of injury and fire.
Confirm the coincidence of rated voltage of the product and voltage of AC power source.
There is a fear of injury and fire.
Never connect resistor directly to between + 1〜 - and + 2〜 - or + 1〜 + 2 of DC terminals.
There is a fear of fire.

Please read surely the following precautions.

DANGER [as to operation]
Surely after fitting the front cover, turn ON input power source. Also, don't remove the cover during power supply.
There is a fear of electric shock.
Don't operate the switch by wet hand.
There is a fear of electric shock.
Don't touch Inverter terminals even if Inverter is stopped, during power supply to Inverter.
There is a fear of electric shock.
As stop button is effective for the signal only which designated operation point, please prepare emergency stop switch separately.
There is a fear of injury.
If alarm is reset keeping the input of operation signal, Inverter restart suddenly and therefore, reset the alarm after
confirming of no operation signal.
There is a fear of injury.

CAUTION [as to operation]
Don't touch radiation fin and radiation resistor since they become hot much.
There is a fear of burn.
Since operation of Inverter can be set from low speed until high speed, operate Inverter confirming enough the permissible range of motor and machine.
There is a fear of injury.
In case of need of hold-brake, please prepare it separately.
There is a fear of injury.

DANGER [as to maintenance/inspection, exchange of parts]
Make inspection after passing of 10 minutes or more from turning off of input power source. Also, check DC voltage
between + 1〜 - or + 2〜 - and confirm that it is less than 30V.
There is a fear of electric shock, injury and fire.
Confirm the coincidence of rated voltage of product and voltage of AC power source.
There is a fear of electric shock.
Maintenance/inspection and exchange of parts should be done by designated persons only.
Use insulated tools at the time of maintenance/inspection.
There is a fear of electric shock and injury.

DANGER [others]
Never remodel the Inverter.
There is a fear of electric shock and injury.

General Cautions
Since there are cases that illustrations in this Manual are shown in the state of removing the safety cover or shield for the
purpose of explanation of the details, please restore such safety materials to the state as before and operate in accordance with the Manual, at the time of operation of product.
Safety precautions and specifications written in the Manual are subject to change for improvement without notification inadvance, for which please understand.

IndexINDEX
Chapter 1 Guides before use
1. Handling method
2. Circuit composition
3. Terminal specification
Chapter 2 For operation of VF64
1. Confirmation before operation
2. As to DIP Switch on the control P.C.Board (VFC64)
3. Function of console panel (SET64)
4. Changeover of Inverter control mode
5. As to auto-tuning
6. Test operation method of Inverter
7. Display of console panel
8. Display of protective operation and protection history
9. Operation at the time of exchange of P.C.Board
Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items
1. Table of setting items of speed sensorless vector control system (VF64S mode)
2. Table of setting items of vector control system with speed sensor (VF64V mode)
3. Table of setting items of V/F control system (VF64 mode)
4. Explanation of setting items
Chapter 4 Selection of peripheral devices and options
1. Selection guide
2. Input/output devices and wiring
3. AC Reactor
4. Noise filter
5. DC Reactor
6. VF61R /VF64R Sine wave converter
7. Dynamic brake unit (DB Unit)
8. Corresponding standards
Chapter 5 Function-up option
1. Extension cable and metal fitting
2. Isolated input card : ISO64
3. Isolated input output card : IO64
4. Motor temperature compensation : T/V61V
Chapter 6 Communication system up option
1. OPCN64 : OPCN-1(JPCN-1) compliance
2. ASYC64 : Complied with RS232C/RS485 start-stop synchronous serial communication
3. DNET64 : Complied with DeviceNet
4. PBUS64 : Complied with PROFIBUS
Chapter 7 System-up option
1. HC(High speed control) function
2. Sequence(PLC) function
3. Trace back monitor function
4. Trend monitor function
5. Console data setting function
Chapter 8 Maintenance inspection
1. VF64 protection display and trouble shooting
2. Periodical inspection
3. Insulation resistance test
4. Disposal
5. Compatibility with old models
Chapter 9 Standard specifications
1. Common specifications
2. Table of types
3. Table of capacities
4. Outline dimensions
Chapter 10 Necessary information to us in the inquiry from customers

1
1
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
10
16
19
20
22
23
24
30
36
43
87
87
88
89
90
91
91
91
94
96
96
97
97
98
98
98
99
99
99
100
100
100
100
100
100
101
101
108
109
109
109
112
112
114
115
117
121

Chapter 1 Guides before use

Chapter 1 Guides before use
1.

Handling method

1-1. Acceptance inspection(1)

Upon receipt of the product, please confirm the following points.
Whether specifications and accessories, spare parts, options are properly in accordance with your order.
Please check the type of Inverter unit by Series Mark on the surface of cover.
Surface of cover Indication example of the type

VF64

Series name of Inverter(shows product of VF64 series)

7R522

Type 7R522
Voltage class: shows 200V class
Output capacity: shows 7.5kW

INPUT 3φ200〜230V 50/60Hz

Input power source voltage specification
Inverter output capacity, current

OUTPUT 7.5kW 32.5A(2)Whether any damages during transportation are found in the received Inverter.

(3)

Whether looseness or drop out of screw is found.
If any problem is found, please contact us or our distributor.
7.5KW or less

11kW or over

Front view
Side view
Note 1. Panel for VF64 of 7.5kW or less is resin made.
Note 2. Depending on outline dimension, position ofterminal block differs. See outline
dimension of Chapter 8, item 4.

Front view
Side view
Note 1. Panel for VF64 of 11kW or over is metallic.
Note 2. Depending on outline dimension, position ofterminal block differs. See outline dimensionof Chapter 8, item 4.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read [Instruction Manual] carefully before use and operate Inverter correctly.
Our Inverter is not designed and manufactured for use in any equipment or system that is applied in an environment affecting human life. If you intend to use the product for specific applications such as passenger
mobile, medical, aerospace, nuclear control or submarine relay equipment or system, please contact us.
Our product is manufactured under strict quality control however, a safety device or system must be usedwith the product when applied to any facility in which failure of the Inverter to perform can be reasonably expected to cause a problem critical to human life or its loss. When using the Inverter with any load other than
3-phase AC motor, please contact us.
This product requires electrical work, which must be done by specialists.
1

Chapter 1 Guides before use

1-2. Opening of front coverIn case of operation of DIP Switch SW1 on P.C.Board by maintenance inspection and auto-tuning, open
front cover by the following order.
1-2-1. In case of VF64 of 7.5kW or less using resin panel and cover.
(1) Remove the fixing screws at the lower part of front cover.
(2) When the lower part of front cover is pulled to this side, cover opens to about 90 degrees.
(3) When front cover is pushed to the inside in the state of fully opened, cover can be fixed.
1-2-2. In case of VF64 of 11kW or over using metallic panel and cover.
(1) Remove the fixing screws at the lower part of front cover.
(2) When front cover is opened to about 45 degrees, remove the insertion at the hitching of upper part ofcover. Then, front cover can be removed.
CAUTION [as to drive operation]
In case of opening of cover just after operation, please wait until going off of [CHG] lamp on main circuit printed board.
Housing of VF64 of 7.5kW or less is resin panel. Pay attention since giving an excessive force could result in breakage.

1-3. Name of each part (example of VF64 of 7.5kW or less)Control circuit

Console panel(SET64)

Radiation fin

printed board
Front cover(VFC64)Note:
Position of cooling
fan motor varies
depending on capacity
Cooling fan motor
Main circuit orgate circuit
printed board

Position of cover fitting screw

VFC64TB or option
printed board forcommunication

CAUTIONS at the exchange of parts
Don't disassemble immoderately.
After reassembage, confirm that each units were correctly assembled.
If assembly is not correct, there is a fear of fire.
Specially if flat cable was not correctly inserted, control circuit may not work normally, for which please pay attention.
As to tightening of screws, please do it surely.

2Chapter 1 Guides before use

1-4. Installation place of the unit
Conditions of installation place affect much the service life and reliability of the Inverter unit. Avoiding the places
shown below, please use Inverter in the operating conditions written in the catalog.
(1). Moist or dusty place. Place exposed to water or oil drips. Uses of Inverter at such places make circuit insulation
deteriorate and service life of parts shorten.
(2). If service temperature is too high, life of condenser and fan motor is shortened.
(3). When Inverter is used at the place exposed to corrosive gas, mal-contact of connectors, disconnection of wires,
breakage of parts will occur.
(4). When Inverter is used at the vibrative place, mal-contact of connectors, disconnection of wires, breakage of parts will
occur.
(5). In case that Inverter is used at the place of ambient temperature of less than 0 , warm it by heater, etc. up to 0ormore at starting. If it is warmed to 0
or more after starting by its own generation of heat, there is no problem.

CAUTION [as to installation]
Install the Inverter on the noninflammable material such as metal, etc.
There is a fear of fire.
Don't put the inflammable material near to the Inverter.
There is a fear of fire.
Don't take front cover of the Inverter at the time of carrying.
There is a fear of injury by dropping.
Install the Inverter at an endurable place against weight.
There is a fear of injury by dropping.
Don't install and operate damaged Inverter, or Inverter of which parts are omitted.
There is a fear of injury.

1-5. Installation method of the unit
In case of use of VF64 Inverter installing in the control panel, etc., install it as stated below.

As to installation method
If Inverter is not installed properly, there is a fear of electric shock and fire.
(1) Installation direction
Install VF64 Inverter vertically with the series mark VF64 set at the upper side. If it is installed laterally, ventilation isprevented and there may be a case of rising of temperature. Route of suction/exhaust must be considered enough.
Cooling fan in the unit sucks air from the lower side and exhaust it to the upper side.
Please provide enough space so that ventilation is not prevented by wiring duct, etc.
(2) In case of installation of Inverter placing its fin-part at the rear outside of control panel
VF64-3744, 3722 or less can be installed placing their fin-part at the rear outside of control panel.
VF64-4544, 4522 or over also can be installed as stated above but air of inside and outside cannot be insulated
enough.
As to heat generation amount of other than fin part, please consult with us.
(3) Ventilation
Example of energy loss of Inverter.
Energy loss of VF64 Inverter is 2.5〜5% of the capacity of motor load.
EXAMPLE 3.7kW x 5% = 185W In case that motor load is 3.7kW, loss is 185W.
Percentage of energy loss to Inverter capacity is as shown below.
2.2〜37kW: 5%
45〜55kW
:4%75〜90kW: 3%
110〜315kW: 2.5%
Exhaust amount of heat generated from VF64 Inverter in case of forced exhaust to the outside of panel by cooling
fan fitted to control panel can be calculated by equation shown below.
Q = q /｛ρ.C.(To-TA) ｝
q : Generated heat amount of VF64 (kW)
Whereas,Q : Exhaust amount (m3/s)
C : Specific heat (1.0kj/kg・ )ρ : Density (1.057〜1.251kg/m3)
To : Exhaust fan outlet temperature ( )TA : Control panel suction hole temperature ( )In case that ambient temperature of control panel is 40 , it is necessary to make exhaust temperature to less than
50 . Since temperature difference between suction and exhaust is 10 , exhaust capacity of about 0.1m3/s isneeded in order to exhaust the loss of 1kW.

3

Chapter 1 Guides before use(4) To secure cooling space
As to installation of VF64 Inverter main body and DCL (DC Reactor), secure the cooling space making the figures
below as criterion (The figures are example of VF64 of less than 7.5kW. Secure double of space for VF64 of morethan 11kW).
Also, if peripheral devices generate heat, install them making no influence to the cooling of the unit.
In case that VF64 Inverter is installed in the control panel, ventilate to make the temperature in panel to less than 50
C (If ambient temperature is high, reliability falls).
DCL

Inverter unit

20cm or overExhaust15cm or over

15cm or over

5cm or over

5cm or over
10cm or over

15cm or over

15cm or over

15cm or overSuction(5) Matters to be attended
・As DC Reactor (DCL) becomes hot (there is a case to exceed 100 ℃), secure enough space between DCL andother devices.
・Exhaust generated heat of Inverter and DCL to the outside of panel surely. Also, arrange not to circulate the exhaust air of Inverter in panel.
・In case of use of dynamic brake unit, install brake resistor at outside of panel to the utmost.
・Avoid use of Inverter unit at the place of extremely bad environment.

1-6. Cautions on wiring(1) Input the specified voltage to the input terminal of Inverter.
If 400V is inputted to the Inverter of 200V class, Inverter is broken.
(2) Since Inverter is operated by high frequency using IGBT as its element, it generates noise much.
Pay attention on the following points at wiring work.
Make wiring of main circuit wires and control signal line separately. In case of parallel wiring, apart them morethan 30cm each other. In case of crossing, cross them at right angles.

Control signal line

In case ofparallel wiring

In case of crossing
at right angles
more than 30cm

Control signal line
Crossing at right angles
Main circuit wiring

Main circuit wiring(3) In order to prevent entering of noise, use shield wire or twisted wire for control signal line.
(4) In case that frequency (speed) is set at outside of control panel, lay signal line containing in the conduit pipes or metallic pipes.
(5) When wiring length between Inverter and motor is over 10m in case of 400V class Inverter, surge may be added to input voltage of motor by inductance of wiring. In case of use of existing motor of poor insulation reinforcement, there isa possibility of breakage of motor caused by deterioration of insulation. At the time of such application, please consult
with us.
(6) As to wire size of main circuit wiring, see [Input/Output devices and wiring] of Chapter 4, item 2.
(7) In case that shield wire is used for output wiring or wiring length is over 300m and when VF64 Inverter is operated byits DC excitation function, there may be a case that Inverter is broken or it does not work normally caused by leakage
capacitance to earth of output wiring of Inverter and resonance phenomenon of input power source inductance. In
such case please contact us.
(If wiring length is over 100m when Inverter is operated by its DC excitation function using DCL of option in the capacity of 1.1〜 3.7kW, please contact us)

As to earth leakage circuit breaker
IGBT is used for main circuit element of VF64 Inverter. Since leak current increases caused by high carrier frequency,
use earth leakage circuit breaker of exclusive use for Inverter.

4

Chapter 1 Guides before use

MCCB-F
FM

76B

DCL

MCCB

52M

Noise filter
option200〜230V

1
8N

Dynamic brake unit option(Note.7)

2

1

52MAX

P
PR

(Note.6)
Brake resistor
option(Note.5)(Note.8)

DBR(Note.6)
76B

52M

Noise filter
optionSET64

380〜460V
50/60Hz(Note.4)

CN2

TB2

VFC2001(Note.1)
Forward run (START-F)

PGA(Note.3) GND

Reverse run (START-R)

PGB

Optionp.c.Board
ISO64or
IO64

Jog for. run (JOG-F)
Jog rev. run (JOG-R)
Emergency stop (EMG. STOP)
Reset

Twist pair shield wire
CO-SPEV (0.5sq×3P)

P12

Z/U

(Note.2)

V
W(RESET)(Note.3)
Inverter run
Inverter run contact
Inverter protection
Inverter protection contact
Shielded wire

CN1

VFC64TB
Speed setter(Frequency setter)
10KΩ2W(Note.3)

Speed meter(Frequency meter)

Analog output(Note.3)(Note.1)

Multifunction output
and sequence output
DC 24V 20mA Max(Note.3)

Multifunction input
and sequence input(Note.3)(Note 1) Control input terminals (ST-F - RESET) and multifunction input terminals (MI1 - MI6) can also be arranged to GND
common input (sink input). In this case, remove jumper pin on VFC2001 P.C.Board from [CN SO] and fit to [CN SI].
(Standard factory default setting is PS common input (source input).)(Note 2) PG is used VF64V(vector control with speed sensor) mode only.
(Note 3) Never connect GND, COM terminal of control circuit with earth.
(Note 4) AC power source terminal (MR,MT) for control circuit is equipped in the Inverter of 1122, 1144 or over. (It is unnecessary to connect with power source ordinary. It is connected only when control circuit power source is required toturn on, such as execution of protection display)(Note 5) Terminals + 1 and + 2 of Inverters of less than 1122 in 200V class and 1544 in 400V class are shorted. (in case ofwithout DCL)
(Note 6) When thermal relay of dynamic resistor (DBR) tripped, break Inverter input.
(Note 7) Mount main circuit connector (52M) in accordance with use condition of customer.
(Note 8) Please wait from turning off to the re-turning on for ten minutes or more when you set up the main circuit contactor(52M) on the input side of the inverter.

5

Chapter 1

Guides before use

Terminal specification+ side terminal of DC power source when sine wave converter is usedor for +side input when sine wave
converter is used.

or for +side input when sine wave
converter is used.

(AC input)

side terminal of DC power source when sine wave converter is used

Surely connect with earth. Connect with earth terminal of NF when noise
filter(NF)is used
VF64-1122,VF64-1144(Inverter can be operated without
connection of this circuit. It is used in case of execution of protection display,
etc. in status of close of main circuit input)

2001

Connect with speed sensor PG
Recommendable cable: Twist pair shield wire
CO-SPEV(0.5sp×3P)

PGA
PGB
Z/U
V
W

U-phase signal of PG(No use)
V-phase signal of PG(No use)
W-phase signal of PG(No use)

No use(de not connect with this terminal)

2001

F is frequency conversion value of rotation
speed.
DC voltage is DC3.6V/60Hz(at TopF 120Hz)
At PG output selection:1/2 or 1/4 pulse output.
Output current is Max 5mA (See Chapter 3,
setting item G-09)

6

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

1. Confirmation before operation
1 − 1 . As to control mode
VF64 has following 3 kinds of control mode. Conforming to the application, select and use the most suitable control mode.
Control mode of our factory set is [VF64] of V/f control mode.
In case of speed sensorless vector control mode

: [VF64S] is displayed

In case of vector control mode with speed sensor: [VF64V] is displayed

In case of V/f control mode

: [VF64] is displayed

1 − 2 . As to auto-tuning
VF64S mode and VF64V mode are to be operated after execution of auto-tuning.
VF64 mode can be operated without execution of auto-tuning however, if auto-tuning including wiring length between
Inverter and motor is executed, Inverter can deliver its performance fully.

1 − 3 . As to replacement of control P.C.Board VFC64 with spare
In order to adapt VFC64 to the Inverter of present use, it is necessary to set Inverter capacity, control mode,
auto-tuning data and adjustment of analog value of DC voltage of intermediate part, etc.

1 − 4 . Kind and summary of operation
Confirmation of control mode,
capacity, voltage
Turning on
the power

Display of VF64
control mode,
capacity, voltage

Example of display
VF64: V/f control mode
7r544: 7.5kW 400V class

Control modechangeover
operation
See item 4

Auto-tuning
operation
See item 5

VFC64 exchange
operation
See item 9

DIP Switch
operation

Power source ON

DIP Switch
operation

Power source ON

Setting of motor
rated value

Power source ON

SET64 operation

Power source
OFF

SET64 operation
Control mode selection
Inverter capacity setting

Power sourceOFF

DIP Switch
ON

Power sourceOFF

As to operation of SET64,
see items 4〜9
Monitor (MONI)
operation(OPR) mode

Press
FNC key Function(FNC) mode
Press MONI.
Basic setting item
OPR key
Extended function
setting item

Press
STOP
RESET keys

Trouble occurs

Trouble occurs
Power source ON

Protective operation display mode
Display of protective operation, history
Display of 1 point trace back*1. As to function and fitting position of DIP Switch, see next item 2.
*2. In case of use of copy function by option console SET64OP, seeInstruction Manual of SET64OP.

7

SET64 operation

Completion by
DIP Switch OFF

Execution of autotuning stated at
the leftChapter 2

For operation of VF64

2. As to DIP Switch on the control P.C.Board (VFC64)
2 – 1 . Function of DIP Switch SW1(1) It is necessary to operate DIP Switch SW1 at the times of changeover of control mode and execution of auto-tuning.
(2) Functions of DIP Switch SW1 are as per table below.
Table of functions of DIP Switch SW1
DIP
SwitchWhen SW1 is set at ON

When SW1 is set at OFF

Inhibition of data writing
Possible to write the data
Clear the protection history, 1 point trace backSetting at the time of ordinary operation
data, trace back data
Possible to rewrite setting data fromNot possible to rewrite setting data from
communication option
communication option
Possible to change Inverter control mode
Setting at the time of ordinary operation
If both SW1-5 and SW1-6 are set at ON, execution Setting at the time of ordinary operationof DC mode auto-tuning is possible in any control
modes(VF64S, VF64V, VF64)
Ordinary, set SW1-6 only at ON and execute.
In case of VF64S, VF64V modes: Possible toexecute full mode auto-tuning. In case of VF64
mode: Possible to execute DC mode auto-tuning.

Setting at the time of ordinary operation

Initializing of set data
Transfer to monitor mode for our adjustment(Don't turn to ON ordinary)

Setting at the time of ordinary operation
Setting at the time of ordinary operation

In case that control mode was changed from VF64 mode to VF64S or VF64V mode, it is necessary to execute fullmode auto-tuning.

2 – 2 . Mounting position of DIP Switch SW1
SW1 is mounted on control P.C.Board VFC64 of standard console (SET64), which is placed under front coverof VF64 Inverter.
P.C.Board

DIP Switch

P.C.Board

8

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

3. Function of console panel (SET64)
Using console panel (SET64) of standard equipment,function of VF64 Inverter can be utilized effectively.
SET64 consists of LED display window (with 4 kinds of unit indication LED) of 7 segments 5 digits and 6 kindsof LED to indicate
the selected status and 8 kinds of key switch for making kinds of operation. in addition to selection of kinds of function andindication/setting of data and monitor diaplay of output voltage/current, etc. during operation, SET64 displays content at the timeof protective operation and protection history. Also, run/stop operation as well as changeover of control system and auto-tuningare performed using console panel.

(At the time of reverse run command,status display
LED [REV] goes on and of forward run command,
this LED does not go on.)9

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

4. Changeover of Inverter control mode4 – 1 . Changeover operation of control mode
Operation method of changeover of control mode from VF64 to VF64S is as shown below.
In case of changeover to other control mode, select necessary control mode from the Table below.
CautionAt the time of changeover of control mode, it is necessary to operate DIP Switch SW1 of control P.C.Boardof VFC64.
As it is dangerous, surely turn off the power when remove the front cover.
Content of operation

Display window

Operation of
console key

Turn Inverter powersource to OFF
Remove the coverNo.5 of the Table right
Display when VF64S isselected by [↑ ][↓ ] keys

DIP Switch of
VFC64 P.C.
Board
Set No.4 ofSW-1 at ON

Close the cover and VF64
turn Inverter power 7r544
After display ofsource to ON
EXAMPLE in case [CHAnGE inVErtEr Control],
SurE blinksof VF64 mode
Press [SET] key
Display of control
mode
Selection of control
Select by [↑ ][↓ ]
mode
keys
Press [SET] key
Decision of control
mode
Recognition ofchangeover
End of changeover
After about 20sec
Turn Inverter powersource to OFF
Return No.4
Remove the coverof SW-1 toOFF
Close the cover
Confirm display byturning of Inverter
power source to ON(Note 1)

When Inverter control mode is changed over, setting item of VF64 becomes initial valueof each control mode. In case of operation by data of "before changeover",surely record thesetting data and reset the data after changeover.

(Note 2)

In case of operation of VF64 Inverter by vector control mode (VF64S, VF64V), it is necessary
to do auto-tuning once, using the motor to be connected. See Auto-tuning of next item.

5. As to auto-tuning
5 – 1 . Method of auto-tuning by control mode
(1) In case of operation by control modes VF64S and VF64V,connect the motor to be used and execute fullmode auto-tuning.
(2) In case of V/f control of control mode VF64, tuning data have been set by standard motor at our factory.Therefore,
Inverter can be operated without DC mode auto- tuning however, performance of VF64 Inverter can be delivered enoughmore by execution of DC mode auto-tuning including wiring length between Inverter and motor.
(3) In case that PWM carrier frequency is changed, please redo auto-tuning.

10Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

(4) Auto-tuning by control mode
Kind of auto-tuning method
Content
Control mode to be applied
Application method

Full mode auto-tuning
VF64S ・ VF64V
To be executed surely before
operation.
Execute auto-tuning including
wiring length between Inverter
and motor.

DC mode auto-tuning
VF64
VF64S・VF64V
In case that data of A18〜
Initial values have been
A25 have been set, tuning
set conforming to eachcapacity however,can be executed without
execute auto-tuning byrunning of motor.
motor to be used and(Data of A18〜A25 do notwiring route. (between
vanish)Inverter and motor)

Condition

Execute testing by motor alone.
Tuning can be executed without disconnection of motor(disconnecting from loaded machine side)from loaded machine.(for prevention of danger, execute
Increase the speed of motor up totuning in the state that loaded machine side is braked)
about rated speed.
Motor does not run.
Auto-tuning time ends within several
Auto-tuning time ends in about 2〜3 minute.
minutes.(differs depending on(differs depending on capacity)
capacity)
Set rated value of motor Set the setting item of [common to VF64S, VF64V, VF64 modes] of the item 5-2 stated below.
to be used
DIP Switch of control
SW1-5, SW1-6: ON
SW1- 6 ON
SW1- 6 ON
P.C.Board VFC64
VF64 mode is changed overto DC mode auto-tuning
automatically.
Automatic setting range of data A11〜A17〜A25
A11〜 A17
A11〜 A17
In case that Inverter was Execute again surely.
initialized(Not necessary if setting copy is executed using SET64OP of option)
Execute again surely.
In case that carrier
frequency was changed

5 – 2 . Setting items of motor rated values required for execution of auto-tuning
In case of execution of auto-tuning, it is not necessary to set the rated values (values shown in the motor rating plate)of motor to be connected with Inverter.
Execute after setting of under-mentioned setting items.
As to setting method of the setting items of the table below, see item 5-3.
Common to VF64S, VF64V, VF64 modes
Display
A-00

Setting range

Content of setting

Unit

Remarks

Max. speed

300〜14700

r min

VF64S,VF64V modes

Max. frequency

15.0〜400.0
12〜Max. speed

Hz

VF64 mode
VF64S mode

A-01

Min. drive speed

A-02

Min. drive frequency
Motor rated capacity

A-03

Motor rated voltage

A-04

Motor rated current

A-05
A-06
A-07
A-08
A-09
A-10

Motor rated speed
No. of motor pole
Motor rated frequency
Motor cooling fan
No. of motor PG pulse
PWM carrier frequencyr min

VF64V mode

0〜Max. speed

110.0〜10.0

Hz

VF64S, VF64V:
Inverter capacity of 3 ranks lower
VF64: 0〜Inverter rated capacity
140〜230V (200V class)280〜460V (400V class)k W

VF64 mode
VF64S,VF64V modes
VF64 modeV

40〜150% of Inverter rated current
0〜150% of Inverter rated current
25〜100% of Max. speedA

60〜3600
1.0〜15.0

P R
kHz

VF64S,VF64V modes
VF64 mode

r min
2,4,6,8,10,12
Pole
Frequency at the time of motor rated speed Hz
0: self cooling type 1: forced cooling type

VF64S mode only is effective
VF64V mode only is effectiveChapter 2

For operation of VF64

5 – 3 . Setting method of motor rated values(1) As to motor rated values, set the values written in the rating plate of motor.
(2) See explanation of Chapter 3, Function Setting Items.
Chapter 3, item 1 is A area items of the table of speed sensorless control mode (VF64S) setting items.
Chapter 3, item 2 is A area items of the table of control mode with speed sensor (VF64V) setting items.
Chapter 3, item 3 is A area items of the table of V/f control mode (VF64) setting items.
(3) Explanation of the following operations is in case of VF64S mode.
Content of operation

Display window

Indicationof status

Monitor mode

FNC goes
off
FNC goeson

Operation of console key

Turn on the power sourceof Inverter

Selection of [Func] ofbasic setting items(transfer to extended
setting items via [Func]

Display example ofPress [MONI,OPR]
setting speed items
keyof basic setting items (FNC mode)
Same as When [SET] is pressed
above
after selection by [↑][↓]

Selection of [Func]

keys, Fund is displayed

No.6 of the Table rightwhen [SET] key is pressed,
1800 of No.7 is displayed

Display of extended
setting area
Display of extended setting
items A area functions
Display setting data ofmax. speed A00
When max. speed ischanged to 1500
Change of setting data ofmax. speed A00
Decision of max.
speed setting data
Display of max.
speed setting items
Max. speed setting
items

Same as Select A-00 by [↑][↓]
above
keys
4th digit blinks Same as When [SET] key is
abovepressed,1800 is displayed
4th digit blinks Same as
above
Same as By [JOG/→] key, transfer
above
blinking to 3rd digit
Same as Change from 8 to 5 byabove[↑][↓] keys
Same as When [SET] key is
abovepressed,A-00is displayedSame as By [JOG/→] key, transfer
above
blinking to 1st digit
Same as Pressing [↑] key, changeabove
1st digit to 1. When [SET]
key is pressed, 12 is displayed

Display of min. speed(initial value 12)
Use 12 of initial value
without change
Min. speed setting
items
Change to motor rated
capacity setting items
Display of motor rated
capacity initial value
Motor rated capacity
No.8 of the Table rightTransfer blinking to the 3rd
digit by [JOG/→] key

Setting example of motor
rated capacity 7.5kW
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated capacity
data setting
Decision of motor
rated capacity data

5th digit blinks

Same as In case of changing, transfer
above
blinking by [JOG/→] key
Same as After 10 sec. of nooperation or whenabove
[SET] key is pressed,
A-01 is displayedSame as Transfer blinking to theabove
1st digit by [JOG/→] key
Same as Pressing [↑] key, change
1st digit to 2. When [SET]above
key is pressed,̲0.00 is
displayedSame asabove
Same as Transfer blinking to theabove
3rd digit by [JOG/→] key
Same as 7 is set by [↑][↓] keys
above
Same as Blinking transfers to 2nd
abovedigit by [JOG/→] key
Same as Set at 5 by [↑][↓] keys.
above
When [SET] key ispressed, A-02 is displayedSame asabove

12

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

Content of operation
Set A03〜A05 of motor
rated voltage similarly toaforesaid A00〜A02
Motor pole selection
setting items
Display motor pole
selection data
Decision of data 4 poles
by motor pole selection
Motor pole selection
setting items
Set motor rated
frequency A07〜A10
similarly to the above
No.25 of the Table rightSelect 4 Poles by [↑][↓] keys

5−4.

Display window

Indication Operation of console keyof status
FNC goes Select, pressing [↑]key
onSame as Change to 6, pressing[↑] key. When [SET]above
key is pressed,4PoL isdisplayedSame as Select 4 poles by[↑][↓] keys
above
Same as Decide data, pressing[SET] key.A-06 is displayed
aboveSame asabove
Same as Transfer blinking to
the 1st digit by
above[JOG/-] key

Reset from extended setting
items to basic setting items(Reset to basic setting
mode via [Fund])Same as Transfer blinking to the
4th digit (alphabet)above
by [JOG/→] key

Selection of Fundfunction

Same asabove

By [↑][↓] keys, select[Fund]. When [SET] key ispressed, Func is displayed

Display of basic
setting mode

Same asabove

Reset to basic
setting mode

Display example ofsetting speed

Same asabove

Select basic setting
item by [↑][↓] keys

Operation method of full mode auto-tuning

CAUTION

Motor does not run, just after starting of auto-tuning, owing to auto-tuning of DC mode however, motor
speed increases to near the rated speed after passing of about 1 minute (time differs depending on the
motor capacity), for which please pay attention.

Explanation of the following operation is in case of VF64S mode (common operation to VF64V mode).
Console key
DIP switch ofContent of operation
Display window
operation
VFC64 P.C.Board
Turn off Inverter power source
Set No.6 of SW-1
Remove the coverat ON
Close the cover and turn on
Inverter power source
EXAMPLE in case of
VF64S mode
When [JOG/→] key
Auto-tuning modeis pressed, tunSt
is displayed

No.5 of the Table right
When [JOG/→] key is pressed,
atuo-tuning starts

Auto-tuning starts
Auto-tuning ends
After several min.
Data(Table 4) of A11〜A25 of under-mentioned auto-tuning setting items are set
automaticallyTurn off Inverter power source
Remove the cover
Return No.6 ofSW-1 to OFF
Close the cover
Turn on Inverter power source
Confirm that each setting data of A11〜A25 have been set
Display of console panel differs depending on the kind of auto-tuning.

13

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

In case of tun: Shows full mode auto-tuning.
In case of tund : Shows DC mode auto-tuning.
In case of tun̲2 : Shows full mode auto-tuning of the 2nd motor.
In case of tund2 : Shows DC mode auto-tuning of the 2nd motor.

◆mark

5 – 5 . Operation method of DC mode auto-tuning(1) Explanation of the following operation is in case of VF64 mode (common to VF64S, VF64V modes).
Content of operation

Display window

Console key
operation

Turn off Inverter power source
Remove the cover

Set No.6 of SW-1 at
ON. In case of
VF64S, VF64V,
modes, set Nos.5, 6
at ON

Close the cover and turn on
Inverter power source
EXAMPLE in case of VF64
mode
Auto-tuning mode

No.6 of Table rightAuto-tuning ends

DIP switch of
VFC64 P.C.Board

When [JOG/→] key
is pressed, tunSt isdisplayed

Auto-tuning starts
after about 60 sec.
Auto-tuning ends
Data (Table of item 5-7) of A11〜A17 of under-mentioned auto-tuning setting
items are set automaticallyTurn off Inverter power source
Remove the cover
Return No.6
(or Nos.5,6) of
SW-1 to OFF
Close the cover
Turn on Inverter power source
Confirm that each setting data of A11〜A17 have been set

5 – 6 . Fault during auto-tuning
When fault occurred during auto-tuning, under-mentioned marks are displayed on console panel and Inverter stops.
When [SEtO] was displayed, setting error of A-00〜A-10 can be considered. Revise the setting and redo from the beginning.
When [tun- -] was displayed, it means that there is an error in the result of auto-tuning. Confirm whether A-00〜A-10
were erroneously set or wiring between Inverter and motor was disconnected, and redo from the beginning.
Other protection diaplay: It means that protection operated during auto-tuning. Eliminate individual cause and redo
from the beginning.

5 – 7 . Setting items by auto-tuning
Setting items by atuo-tuning (A area setting numbers)
Extendedsetting item
Nos.

Full mode auto-tuningmodes

DC mode auto-tuning
mode

modes

Dead time compensation quantity (U phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (U phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (U phase +side)
Dead time compensation quantity (U phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (U phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (U phase -side)
Dead time compensation quantity (V phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (V phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (V phase +side)
Dead time compensation quantity (V phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (V phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (V phase -side)
Dead time compensation quantity (W phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (W phase +side) Dead time compensation quantity (W phase +side)
Dead time compensation quantity (W phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (W phase -side) Dead time compensation quantity (W phase -side)

Motor, primary resistanceMotor, secondary resistanceMotor leakage inductanceMotor inductanceMotor inductance saturationcompensation 1
Motor inductance saturationcompensation 2
Motor iron loss conductanceMotor loss factor 1
Motor loss factor 2

Motor, primary resistanceMotor, primary resistanceItems in column of full mode
auto-tuning are not set

Items in column of full mode
auto-tuning are not set(Values, at the time when full mode
auto-tuning was executed, are held)

14

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

5 – 8 . Method of auto-tuning of the 2nd motor(1) VF64 Inverter can drive 2 motors changing over.
Factory default setting is for use of only 1 motor (the first motor).
(2) For use of the 2nd motor, execute under-mentioned setting.
Set function setting item L-00 of the Table below at ON.
Assign the 2nd motor selection (P.56 ) of "Setting Item C, Relative of multifunction input/output" to multifunction input terminalfor enabling of supply of voltage from terminal PS.
(3) Before execution, set the rated values (values written in the motor rating plate) of the 2nd motor connected with Inverter,
to the under-mentioned setting items (L-01〜L-08). As to the method, please set by similar operation to that of aforesaid[5-3, Setting method of motor rated value].
Common to VF64S, VF64V, VF64 modes
Setting item
No.

Content of setting

Setting range

Unit

L-00

Selection of use of 2nd

Usually: OFF

L-01

motor function
2nd motor capacity

VF64S,VF64V: Inverter capacity of

Remarks
Select ON when 2nd motor

At use : ONk W

is drived
In case of VF64S, VF64V
modes

3 ranks down〜Inverter capacity

In case of VF64 mode

VF64: 0〜Inverter rated capacity
140〜230V (200V class)

V

L-02

2nd motor rated voltage

L-03

2nd motor rated current

L-04

2nd motor rated speed
25〜100% of max. speedr min
2nd motor pole
Pole
2,4,6,8,10,12
2nd motor rated frequency Frequency at the time of motor rated speed Hz
VF64S mode only is effective
0 : self cooling type2nd motor cooling fan
1 : forced cooling typeNo. of PG pulse of 2nd motor 60〜3600
P R VF64V mode only is effective

L-05
L-06
L-07
L-08

280〜460V (400V class)40〜150% of Inverter rated current
0〜150% of Inverter rated current

In case of VF64S, VF64v modesn case of VF64 modeA(4) Even though auto-tuning only of the 2nd motor is executed, 2nd motor cannot be driven in case that data of A-11〜A-16of the aforesaid [Setting items (A area setting Nos.) by auto-tuning], which to be set by the first motor, were not set.
Execute auto-tuning of the first motor.
(5) Operation of full mode auto-tuning of the 2nd motor
Operate similarly to the aforesaid [operation method of Item 5-4 full mode auto-tuning].
Display of auto-tuning mode will be [tun 2].
(6) Operation of DC mode auto-tuning of the 2nd motor
Operate similarly to the aforesaid [operation method of Item 5-5 DC mode auto-tuning].
Display of auto-tuning will be [tund 2].

5 – 9 . Setting items by auto-tuning of the 2nd motor
Setting items by auto-tuning of the 2nd motor
Extended

Full mode auto-tuning

setting item
L-09

VF64S, VF64V modes
2nd motor, primary resistance

L-10
L-11
L-12
L-13
L-14
L-15
L-16
L-17

Items in column of full mode auto- Items in column of full mode auto2nd motor, 2ndary resistance
2nd motor leakage inductancetuning are not set
tuning are not set
2nd motor inductance(Values, at the time when full mode
2nd motor inductance saturation compensation1
auto-tuning was executed, are held)
2nd motor inductance saturation compensation2
2nd motor iron loss conductance
2nd motor loss factor 1
2nd motor loss factor 2

15

DC mode auto-tuning
VF64S, VF64V modes

VF64 mode
2nd motor, primary resistance

2nd motor, primary resistanceChapter 2

For operation of VF64

6. Test operation method of Inverter
At first, confirm operation of Inverter with no load (connected with motor alone). After that, confirm operation connecting withload (machine). Under-mentioned is for confirmation test of Inverter with motor alone.

6 – 1 . Conditions of test operation method(1) Load is motor alone (status of no load).
(2) Control mode is V/f control VF64 mode.
(3) Without auto-tuning (or auto-tuning has already been executed).
(4) Execute run/stop by console panel.
(5) Method is explained by the case of motor capacity 7.5kW, voltage 400V class.
(6) Output frequency is set at 60Hz (in case that rated frequency of motor is 60Hz).

6 – 2 . Setting item
Standard Setting
item console LED

Rewriting during operation 0 mark: Possible, X mark: Impossible
Setting range

Setting range (selection item)

Initializing data
at default

Unit

0.5
1.0
-1.0
30.0
30.0
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0

Hz
Hz
Hz
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
%
%
%

Rewritingduring operation(Basic setting item)

0. ErEF
1. FJoG
2. RJoG
3. Acc1
4. dEc1
5. Acc2
6. dEc2
7. tbSt
8. dcbr
9. StbFunc-Max.frequency〜Max.frequency
Setting frequency
Min.frequency〜30.0
For. jog frequency-30.0〜-Min.frequency
Rev. jog frequency
Accel time (1)0.0〜3600.0
Decel time (1)0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
Accel time (2)Decel time (2)0.0〜3600.0
Torque boost level
0.0〜20.0
DC brake voltage
0.0〜20.0
Stabilizer quantity
0.0〜100.0
Selection of extended function Transfer to extended function by [SET] key(b area) Selection of operation mode, operation sequence
Select setting position at theb-15
0: Terminal block
time of interlocking
1: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
2: Digital communication option
Select setting position of
0: Interlocking
b-16
frequency command
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
4: Isolation analog input option
Select setting position of
b-17
0: Interlocking
operation command
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
Select setting position of
0: Interlocking
b-18
jog command
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option

1

0

0

0

6 – 3 . Operation of setting by console panel(1) When FNC, which display the status, goes on by pressing of FNC key, console turns to FNC mode and setting item is displayed.
Content of operation
Display window
No
Install motor at safe place
1
Finish wiring of motor
2
Turn on Inverter power3source. Confirm control V F 6 4
mode, capacity,
7 r 5 4 4

4

Indication Operation of console keyof status

Each displays
about 1
sec.
FNC goes off

16Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

Indication
Operation of console key
Content of operation
Display windowof status
Select FNC mode
FNC goes on Press [FNC] key
Display basic setting item, 0. F r E F
Same as Select by [↑][↓] keys
frequency command item
above
Display frequency
Digit display data blinks
When [SET] key is pressed,command data
data is displayed.
0. 5(Display initial value 0.5Hz)
digit display data blinks
Return after 10 sec. of no operation
Display frequency
Digit display data blinks FNC goes on Transfer blinking to 3rdcommand data
digit data by [JOG/→] key

0. 5

No.5 of Table right
When [FNC] key is pressed,
above FNC goes on

No.8 of Table rightTransfer blinking to 3rd digit
data by [JOG/→] key

Display frequency
command data

Digit display data blinks Same as Change 3rd digit data
to 6 by[↑][↓] keys
above

Display frequency
command data

Digit display data blinks

Display frequency
command data
Set at 60Hz

Digit display data blinks Same as Change 1st digit data to 0by [↑][↓] keys. When [SET]above

6 0. 5
6 0. 5

6

0. 0

17

key is pressed, data is fixed,
and O.FrEF is indicatedSame asFix frequency command 0. F r E F
item data
above
Set and confirm setting data of extended function item b area for selection of input
position of frequency command and operation command.
Same as Select by [↑][↓] keys.
Select extended functionabove
By pressing of [SET]F u n ckey, Fund is displayed.
Same as Select A-00 by [↑][↓]
Display extended
keys
F
u n d
function area
above
Display extended
Same asfunction A area
A
0 0
above
Digit display data blinks Same as Transfer blinking to 4th
Display extended
function A area
digit by [JOG/→] key
above
A
0 0
Digit display data blinks Same as Change 4th digit to b by
Display extended
function b area[↑][↓] keys
above
b
0 0
Display extended
Digit display data blinks Same as Transfer blinking to 2nd
digit by [JOG/→] key
function b area
above
b
0 0
Display extended
Digit display data blinks Same as Change 2nd digit to 1
by [↑][↓] keys
function b area
above
b
1 0
Display extended
Digit display data blinks Same as Transfer blinking to 1st
digit by [JOG/→] key
function b area
above
b
1 0
Display extended function Digit display data blinks
Same as Change 1st digit to 5 byb area (select setting position
above[↑][↓] keys
at the time of interlocking)b
1 5
Display data of b-15
Same as When [SET] key is
Selection of setting position
above
pressed, data is displayed
1
at the time of interlocking.
Select1 by [↑][↓] keys.
Sameas
Select data of b-15 Selection
1of setting position at theabove When [SET] key is pressed, datatime of interlocking.
Establish data of selection of Digit display data blinks
setting position at the time ofinterlockingb
1 5

No.14 of Table rightSelect Func by [↑][↓] keys

Same as Transfer blinking to 1st
digit data by [JOG/→] key
above

Display b-16 Selection of
frequency commandsetting position.
Display data of b-16
Selection of frequency
command setting position.
Select data of b-16 at
interlocking of 0 (interlocks
with selection position of b-15)

Digit display data blinksb

1

are fixed and b-15 is displayedSame asabove
Same as Change 1st digit to 6 by[↑][↓] keys. When [SET]above
key is pressed, 0 is
displayed

60Same asabove
Same as Select 0 by [↑][↓] keys.
When [SET] keys is
above

0

pressed, data is fixed andb-16 is displayed

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

Indication
Operation of console key
Content of operation
Display windowof status
Establish data of b-16
Same
as
Digit display data blinks
Selection of frequency
abovecommand setting position.
1 6bDigit display data blinks FNC goes on Transfer blinking to 1st
Select frequency
digit by [JOG/→] key
command setting position.
1 6bDisplay b-17 Selection of Digit display data blinks Same as Change 1st digit to 7
operation commandaboveby [↑][↓] keys
setting position.
1 7b
Display data of b-17
Same as When [SET] key ispressed,data are fixed
Selection of operation
above
displayedcommand setting position.
Select data of b-17 at
Same as Display 0 by [↑][↓] keys.
interlocking of 0
When [SET] key is
above(interlocks with selection
pressed, data are fixed
position of b-15)
and b-17 is displayed
Digitdisplaydata
blinksSame
as
Fix data of b-17 Selection
aboveof frequency command
1 7binput position.

(Note) Setting method of -(minus) data
increases by

key(minus)Numerical value data
decreases by

key

When frequency command Digit display data blinks
data display 60Hz is set
at -(minus)-(minus) indication is
Digit display data blinks
done at 5th digit only
Digit display data blinks

No.3 of the Table right
Display- (minus) at 5th
digit by[↑][↓]keys

Transfer blinks to 5th
digit by [JOG/→] key
Display -(minus) by [↑][↓]
keys. When [SET] key ispressed, data are fixedand O.FrEF is displayed

Display frequency command item

6 – 4 . Run/stop operation by console panel(1) Confirm that installatiton place of motor, and wiring between Inverter and motor are safe.
(2) Turn on the power to Inverter.
(3) Since Inverter is set in the status to be operated by console panel, LED of status
display [DIR] goes on. Please confirm.
(4) When operation key [MONI.OPR/FNC] of console panel is pressed, LED of status
display [FNC] goes off. As the mode turns to [MONI.OPR] at this time, run/stop
operations become possible.
(5) When [START] key is pressed, LED of status display [RUN] goes on. At the sametime, motor starts and rotation speed increases up to that of 60Hz.
Please confirm that rotation is normal.
(6) When [SET] key is pressed during running, kinds of indications such as output
frequency/ output voltage/ output current, etc. during running can be confirmed.
(As to content of indication, see next Item 7).
Operate by [START] key
display 60Hz

(7) In case of change of operation frequency, press [FNC] key during running.
LED of status display [FNC] goes on. By this mode, data of [O.FrEF] of frequency
command can be changed from 60Hz to 30Hz, etc.

Status display LED [RUN] goes on[DIR] goes on[STOP] key [RUN] goes off(Don't set at frequency of more than 60Hz).
(8) When [STOP] key is pressed, motor decelerates and stops.
When stopped, LED of status display [RUN] goes off.

18

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

7. Display of console panel
7 — 1 . Content of monitoring
Content of indicatiion by VF64S, VF64V modes and VF64 mode is as per Table below.
modes
Content
Motor speed
Speed command (set speed)

SET64 display
S P d
S r E F

Output current
I o u tt r E F
Torque command
V d c
DC voltage
Output voltage
V o u tOutput frequency
F o u tOverload countero L c n t
Line speed
L
S P
Motor temperaturet E n P
Input terminal check 1
i 1 cHi 2 cH
Input terminal check 2
Input terminal check 3i 3 cH
Output terminal check 1o 1 cH
Output terminal check 2o 2 cH
Main body program version
V E r
Sequence version
V E r S q
Super block version
V E r S b
Monitor for analog gain adjustment G
A d J(For our adjustment andS P d S P
unused ordinary)
Display of protection historyt r b L E

mode
Unit
r/min
r/min
A
%
V
V
Hz
%
m/min
℃
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit

Content
SET64 display
Output frequency
F o u tFrequency commandF r E F(set frequency)
Output current
i o u tOutput torque (torque current) t o u t
DC voltage
V d c
Output voltage
V o u tMotor speed
S P dOverload countero L c n t
S PLine speed
L
Motor temperaturet E n P
Input terminal check 1
i 1 cH
Input terminal check 2i 2 cH
Input terminal check 3i 3 cHo 1 cH
Output terminal check 1o 2 cH
Output terminal check 2
Main body program version
V E r
Sequence version
V E r S q
Super block version
V E r S b
Monitor for analog gain adjustment G
A d J(For our adjustment andS P d S P
unused ordinary)
Display of protection historyt r b L E

Unit
Hz
Hz
A
%
V
V
r/min
%
m/min
℃
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit

(Note 1) Console panel SET64 has not Unit indications of %, m/min, C, bit.

7 — 2 . Operation
Turn on the power and after display of control mode and capacity, mode of Inverter turns to monitor mode automatically.
If [SET] key is pressed within 1 sec., content of monitor can be changed endlessly.
Data changes about 1 sec. after display of content mark of monitor.

No.6 of Table right
Display of trbLE※Output current of protection history is instant value.
Indication Operation of console key
Display window
Content of operationof status
Basic setting item of FNC 3. A c
FNC goesc 1
mode: Example that accel
ontime is displayed
Transfer to monitor mode. i
FNC goes off Press [MONI,OPR/FNC]
o u t(monitor mode) key
Display output current
Same as
Display example of
1 2
0
Display after 1 sec.
above
output current value
Same asChange to display of
Press[SET] key
V
o u t
above
output voltage
Same as540
Display after 1 sec.
Display example ofabove(example of 400V.
output voltage value
270 in case of 200V)
Same as
Display change oft r b L E
Press [SET] key
above
protection historySa m e a s Overcurrent after 1 sec.
1 o c
above
Same asIf [SET] key is pressed, 2 i G t l
U phase IGBT error
above
after 1 sec.
display the content ofmonitor endlessly

When [SET] key ispressed, history is selected

19

Display output current

5 oiSame asabove
Same as
above

V

o u

t

Same asabove

After 1 sec., intermediate
DC part overvoltage
Press [SET] key

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

8. Display of protective operation and protection history
Display of protective operation

part

20

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

8 – 2 . Protective action and operation(1) When protective function in Inverter actuates, Inverter stops immediately and displays content of protective action.
(2) When plural protective functions actuate simultaneously, content of protective action is displayed blinking inorder (max. 8 actions).
(3) Display the data at the time of actuation of protective function in 6 kinds of display as per under-mentioned item 8-3 as
1 point trace back indication. When [SET] key is pressed while content of protection is being displayed, 6 kinds of data at
the time of protective action are indicated endlessly (with interval of 1 sec.).
(4) Display of protective action, and operation
Protective action
Overcurrent
IGBT fault
Display endlesslyIntermediate DCpart overvoltage

Operation of console key

Display window
1. oc
2. iGbt

To 1 point trace backdisplay when [SET] key
is pressed for morethan 3 sec.

8 oV

Display by 1 point endless SrEF

1680 Display data after
Display endlessly

1 sec.

When [SET] key ispressed, return toprotective action displayiout
82. 5 Display data after 1 sec.

No.1 of Table right
When [SET] key is pressed,
1 point trace back is displayed

8 – 3 . Kind of 1 point trace back display
mode

modes
Content of display
Speed command(set speed)
motor speed
Output current
Output voltage

Display window
S r E F

Unit
r/min

Content of display
Frequency command(set frequency)

Display window
F r E F

Hz

Unit

S P d
i o u tV o u tr/minAV

DC voltage

V d c

V

Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
DC voltage

F o u ti o u tV o u t
V d c

Hz
A
V
V

Torque commandt r E F

Output torque(torque current)t o u tNote) output current of 1 point trace back is the largest value in 3 phase currents in a moment.
Electric current (r.m.s) is almost 1/ 2 times as large as a displayed value.

8 – 4 . By elimination of cause of protective action and making the RESET operation, mode
returns to MONI,OPR mode or FNC mode.
However,if protection relay (86A)-Inactive is selected and in case of protective action only of "protection relay-Inactive",
protective action display goes off by stop of operation command.

8 – 5 . When MONI,OPR/FNC key is pressed, it is possible to transfer to MONI or FNC mode,
avoiding display of protective action for a time.

21

Chapter 2

For operation of VF64

9. Operation at the time of exchange of P.C.Board
When control P.C.Board (VFC64) is replaced, under-mentioned operation (9-1) is needed.
VFC64 of spares, etc. is of initial value of default. Please set/adjust it before use on the 4 points stated below, conforming to
the Inverter of present use.
(1) Set VFC64 at Inverter capacity of present use.
(2) Set VFC64 at control mode of present use.
(3) Adjust intermediate part DC voltage.
(4) Adjust other analog values to be inputted from external.

9-1. Setting operation of adjustment of Inverter capacity, control mode and intermediate part DC voltage
Execute adjustment, operating the switch of DIP Switch SW1-7 of the aforesaid item 2-1 "Function of DIP Switch SW1".

Content of operation Display window

DIP Switch on
Operation of
console key VFC64 P.C.
Board

1

Turn off Inverter
power source

2

Remove the cover3

Return to
Close the cover andturn on Inverter power FActory SEttingG
sourceSurE
Display after several sec.
When [SET] key is pressed,
VF64S is displayed

4

Select control mode Example of VF64S Select control modeby [↑][↓] keys
Select control mode V F 6 4 S
After selection pressing[SET] key, display 7r544
Select Inverter capacity Example of 7r544 Select Inverter capacityby [↑][↓] keys

5
6

No.8 of Table right
Adjustment example
of VDC detection voltage(example of 566.0V)
・Transfer the digit by [JOG/-] key
・Adjust by [↑][↓] keys
・Select by [SET] key

7
8

Set SW1-7
at ON

Select Inverter capacity 7 r 5 4 4Adjustment of VDC
detection gain
5 6 0. 0(Fig. left is in caseof 400V)Measure
5 6 6. 0
and adjust VDC
voltage(terminal + 2〜 - )by voltmeter

i n i

9

Initializing of set
data

10
11

E n d
End of default
Turn off Inverter
power source

12

Fit the cover

13

Close the cover

Select by [SET] key
After several sec

・Transfer the digit by[JOG/-] key

・Adjust by [↑][↓] keys
・Select by [SET] keyt
After about 30 sec.

Set SW1-7
at OFF

9-2. Adjustment of analog values to be inputted from external.
Adjust following setting items. As to adjustment method, see setting item G of explanation of Chapter 3, Item 4-8 Setting Items.
Display
G-00
G-01

Content
Analog input +side adjustment gain
Analog input -side adjustment gain

Setting range(selection item) Setting resolution

50.00〜150.00
50.00〜150.00

0.01
0.01

Initializing
data

Unit

100.00100.00%%22Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64 Inverter can set undermentioned standard functions by standard console panel SET64. Functions of VF64 are classified by control system to [speed sensorless vector control], [vector control with speed sensor] and [V/f control]. Kinds offunction are classified to [basic setting item] and [extended function setting]. [extended function setting] is further classified tothe areas shown below in order to makecalling of function easily.
Kind of function

Area

Basic setting
item

Extended function
setting

A
b
c
d

E

23

Speed sensorless vector control mode Vector control with speed
V/f control modesensor mode
Set speed
Set frequency
Forward jog speed
Forward jog frequency
Reverse jog speed
Reverse jog frequency
Accel. time (1)Decel. time (1)Accel. time (2)Decel. time (2)Speed control (ASR) proportional gain (1)Torque boost level
Speed control (ASR) integration time constantDC brake voltage
Speed control (ASR) system inertia moment
Stabilizer amount(extended function selection)
Max. speed, rated value and parameter setting area of motor
Setting of Max. frequency , rated
value ,parameter of motor
Selection area of drive mode, drive sequence
Setting area of relatives of multifunction input / output
Selection area of accel/decel setting, speed setting, jump function, Selection area of accel/decel
setting, Frequency jump funcMRH functiontion, MRH function
Setting area of relatives of torque limiter, torque command
Setting area of relatives ofcharacteristics, speed control, vector control, V/f control
torque limit, V/f pattern

F

Built-in DB activation setting, protective function, trace back setting area

G
H
i
J
L
n
P
S

Analog input / output setting, gain adjustment area
Setting area of relatives of programmed drive, preset drive
Setting area of droop control, machine loss compensation
Communication option setting area
Setting area of 2nd motor parameter, speed control gain
Monitor setting area
Super block constant setting area
Setting of control mode, Inverter capacity (for reading only)Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64S mode
1. Table of setting items of speed sensorless vector control system (VF64S mode)
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
LED display

0.SrEF
1.FJoG
2.rJoG
3.Acc1
4.dEc1
5.Acc2
6.dEc2
7.ASrP
8.ASri9.ASrJ
Func

Fund
A-00
A-01
A-02
A-03
A-04
A-05
A-06
A-07
A-08
A-09
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25

b-00
b-01

b-02
b-03

b-04
b-05
b-06

Setting items(Basic setting items)
Ref (set). SPD.
For. jog speed
Rev. jog speed
Accel time 1
Decel time 1
Accel time 2
Decel time 2
Speed control proportional gain 1
Speed control integrated time constant
Speed control inertia moment
Selection of extended setting area

Setting range (selection items)

Initializing
Unit Rewriting during
operation
data by default

Min. speed〜300-300〜-min. speed

12 r min24 r min-24 r min0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
3〜50
20〜10000
0〜32767

30.0 sec
30.0 sec
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
15
40 ms
10

-Max. speed〜max. speed

Transfer to extended setting area by [SET] key(A area) Setting of max. speed, rated value, parameter of motor
Transfer to basic setting items by [SET] key
Selection of basic setting items
300〜14700
Max. speed
12〜Max. speed
Min. speed
Rated capacity〜capacity of 3 ranks down
Motor capacity
200V class: 140〜230
Motor rated voltage
400V class: 280〜460
Motor rated current
40〜150% of rated current
Motor rated speed
25〜100% of max. speed
2〜12[Pole]
Motor pole selection
Rated speed x pole/120〜rated speed x pole
Motor rated frequency/120+7.0
Motor cooling fan
0: self cooling fan 1: forced cooling fan
1.0〜15.0
PWM carrier frequency
Dead time compensation amount (U phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (U phase -side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (V phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (V phase -side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (W phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (W phase -side) 0〜400
Motor, primary resistanceMotor, 2ndary resistanceSetting range differs, depending on Inverter
Motor leakage inductancecapacity
Motor mutual inductanceMotor inductance saturation compensation 1
Motor inductance saturation compensation 2
0.0〜600.0
Motor iron loss conductance
0.0〜200.0
Motor loss factor 1
0.0〜200.0
Motor loss factor 2(b area) Selection of operation mode, operation sequence
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)Selection of HC(super block) function
0 : Speed control (ASR) mode
Selection of operation (control) mode
1 : Minus(-) direction of torque command has priority
2 : Plus(+) direction of torque command has priority
3 : Torque control (ATR) mode
4 : Contact changeover of speed/torque control
0 : OFF (unused)
1 : ON (use)Selection of highly efficient operation
0 : Free stop
Selection of stop mode
1 : Decel stop
2 : Decel stop with DC brake
0.0〜30.0
Stop frequency
0.0〜10.0
DC brake actuation time
20〜500 (rated excitation current = 100%)
DC brake current

1800 r min
12 r min
0.0 kW0V
0.0 A
0 r min
4 Pole0.0 Hz
0

6 kHz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 mΩ
0 mΩ
0 mH
0 mH
0
0
0.0 mho
0.0
0.0

OFF
0

OFF
1

1.0 Hz0.0 sec
100

24Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64S mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
during
Initializing
Setting range (selection items)
Unit Rewriting
operation
data by default
0
0: Free stop 1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brake
0.0〜10.0
Jog stop frequency
1.0 Hz3〜100
15
Speed control proportional gain 2
0
0: Speed control proportional gain 1
Selection of jog proportional gain
1: Speed control proportional gain 2
OFF
Selection of restart function at instantaneous power failure 0: ON (use) 1: OFF (unused)00: OFF(ordinary)
Selection of reverse run inhibition
1: Inhibition of rotation to reverse direction against command
2: Inhibition of reverse rotation
Selection of regeneration stall prevention function 0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)OFF
0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)Selection of sequence (PLC) functionOFF
1
Selection of setting position at interlocking 0: Terminal block
1: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
2: Digital communication option (RSH64)
0
Selection of speed command setting position 0: Interlocking 1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
4: Isolated analog input option0
Selection of operation command setting position 0: Interlocking 1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option0
Selection of jog command setting position 0: Interlocking 1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
1
Selection of torque command setting position 0: Terminal block
1: Analog option
2: Digital communication option
1
0: AC initial excitation (cannot select) 1: DC initial excitation
Selection of initial excitation

Standard console
Setting items
LED display
b-07
Selection of jog stop mode
b-08
b-09
b-10
b-11
b-12

b-13
b-14
b-15

b-16

b-17

b-18

b-19

b-20

c-00
c-01
c-02
c-03
c-04
c-05
c-06

25

(c area) Relevance of multifunction input/output
Selectioin of multifuntion input position 0: Terminal block 1: Digital communication option
Function-selection of terminaL block MI1 (multi-function input 1) 0: Preset speed command selection 1
Function-selection of terminal block MI2 (multi-function input 2) 1: Preset speed command selection 2
Function-selection of terminal block MI3 (multi-function input 3) 2: Preset speed command selection 3
Function-selection of terminal block MI4 (multi-function input 4) 3: Accel/decel time selection 1
Function-selection of terminal block MI5 (multi-function input 5) 4: Accel/decel time selection 2
Function-selection of terminal block MI6 (multi-function input 6) 5: Speed up command (MRH mode)
6: Speed down command (MRH mode)
7: Speed hold
8: Inhibition of S pattern accel/decel
9: Max. revolution reduction
10: Droop control inactive
11: Torque control selection
12: For/Rev changeover command
13: DC brake command
14: Initial excitation command
15: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A active)
16: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A active)
17: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A active)
18: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A active)
19: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
20: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
21: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
22: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
23: Trace back external trigger
24: Selection of 2nd motor
25: Emergency stop (B contact)
26: Advance of programed operation
27: Selection of speed command terminal block

0
0
1
3
4
7
14

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64S mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting range (selection items)
Setting items
LED display
data by default Unit
operation7
c-07
Function-selection of terminal block MO1 (multi-function output 1) 0: End of programed operation
1
c-08
Function-selection of terminal block MO2 (multi-function output 2) 1: Speed detection (1) (speed = detection setting)0c-09
Function-selection of terminal block MO3 (multi-function output 3) 2: Speed detection (1) (speed＞= detection setting)8c-10Function-selection of terminal block MO4 (multi-function output 4) 3: Speed detection (1) (speed＜= detection setting)
4: Speed detection (2) (speed = detection setting)
5: Speed detection (2) (speed＞= detection setting)
6: Speed detection (2) (speed＜= detection setting)
7: Setting reach
8: Torque detection
9: Absolute value torque detection
10: During power interruption
11: Overload pre-alarm
12: During retry
13: During reverse run
14: Protective operation code
15: Sum check error-max. speed〜+max. speed
0 r minDetection speed (1)c-11-max. speed〜+max. speed
0 r minDetection speed (2)c-12
0 r min0〜600
Speed detection range
c-13
0%Detection torque command (with polarity) -205〜205c-14
0%Detection torque command (absolute value) 0〜205
c-15
50 %
0〜100
Overload pre-alarm operation levelc-16
90.0 %
Speed command reduction rate
50.0〜100.0
c-17

d-02
d-03
d-04
d-05
d-06
d-07
d-08
d-09
d-10
d-11
d-12
d-13
d-14
d-15
d-16
d-17
d-18
d-19
d-20
d-21
d-22
d-23
d-24
d-25

(d area) Accel/decel setting, speed jump function, MRH function selection
0: Accel/decel time 1
Ordinary operation accel-selection
1: Accel/decel time 2
Jog operation accel-selection
2: Accel/decel time 3
3: Accel/decel time 4
0.0〜3600.0
Accel time 3
0.0〜3600.0
Decel time 3
0.0〜3600.0
Accel time 4
0.0〜3600.0
Decel time 4
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)S pattern accel/decel time selection
0.0〜60.0
S pattern rise time 1
0.0〜60.0
S pattern accel reach time 1
0.0〜60.0
S pattern fall time 1
0.0〜60.0
S pattern decel reach time 1
0.0〜60.0
S pattern rise time 2
0.0〜60.0
S pattern accel reach time 2
0.0〜60.0
S pattern fall time 2
0.0〜60.0
S pattern decel reach time 2
1: ON (use)
Speed deviation limit command selection 0 : OFF (unused)
0.0 〜 100Plus-direction deviation max. value-100.0 〜 0.0
Minus-direction deviation max. value
0〜max. speed
Jump (1) speed
0〜max. speed
Jump (2) speed
0〜max. speed
Jump (3) speed
0〜max. speed
Jump (4) speed
0 〜300Jump speed range
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)
MRH function selection
MRH lower limit speed (d-25)〜max. speed
MRH upper limit speed-max. speed〜MRH upper limit speed (d-24)
MRH lower limit speed

E-00
E-01
E-02
E-03
E-04
E-05

(E area) Relevance of torque limit value, torque command characteristics, speed control, vector control
0〜200
150 %
For. powering torque limit value-150 %-200〜0For. regeneration torque limit value-150 %-200〜0Rev. powering torque limit value
150 %
0〜200
Rev. regeneration torque limit value-Unused
0: % command 1: Absolute value command0
Torque command mode selection

d-00
d-01

0
1

30.0 sec
30.0 sec
30.0 sec
30.0 sec
OFF
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
OFF
5.0 %-5.0 %
0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r minOFF
300 r min0 r min-26

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64S mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
Rewriting during
Initializing
Setting range (selection items)
Setting items
LED display
data by default Unit operation
1
E-06
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)
ASR cancelation selection
1
E-07
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)
ASR feedforward selection
E-08
5.00 %
Variable proportional gain variation start speed 0.01〜100.00
20 %
E-09
Ratio of variable proportional minimum gain 0〜100
20.0〜150.0
100.0 %
E-10
Flux command
100.0〜150.0
100.0 %
E-11
Intensification rate of flux at starting
3.0
0.0〜9.9
E-12
Current control proportional gain
E-13
1.5 msCurrent control integrated time constant 0.0〜9.970E-14Gain of Current control feedforward component 0〜200
Use
selectionofmotor
temperaturedetection
E-15
OFF
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)option temperature compensation function
F-00
F-01
F-02
F-03
F-04
F-05
F-06
F-07
F-08
F-09
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
F-14
F-15
F-16
F-17
F-18
F-19
F-20
F-21
F-22
F-23
F-24
F-25
F-26
F-27
F-28
G-00
G-01
G-02

G-03
G-04
G-05
G-06

27

(F area) Built-in DB operation setting, protective function, trace back setting
200V class: 320〜360V
Built-in DB operation level
400V class: 640〜720V
0〜max. speed (A-00) x 1.5
For. run side overspeed setting-max. speed (A-00) X 1.5〜0
Rev. run side overspeed setting
20〜110Overload protection setting
80〜125
FCL level adjustment
1: ON (use)Selection of overtorque protective function 0 : OFF (unused)
Overtorque protective operation level setting 110〜205
Overtorque protective operation standard torque 50〜105
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)Use-selection of speed control error
Speed control error plus side detection range 50〜500
Speed control error minus side detection range -500〜-50
Selection of motor over-heat protective operation 0 : OFF (unused)
Selection of protection relay (86A) operation at power failare 0 : OFF (unused)
0〜5
Times of protection retry
1〜100
Trace back pitch
1〜99
Trace back trigger point
0〜64
Trace back CH1 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH2 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH3 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH4 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH5 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH6 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH7 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH8 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH9 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH10 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH11 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH12 selection

1: ON (use)
1: ON (use)(G area) Analog input/output setting, gain adjustment
50.00〜150.00
Analog input +side adjustment gain
50.00〜150.00
Analog input -side adjustment gain
Analog input setting characteristics selection 0 : 0〜±10V (bipolarity)
1 : 0〜10V (unipolarity)
2 : 4〜20mA
3 : Pulse train
Analog input speed command upper limit speed Absolute value of (G-04)〜100.00
Analog input speed command lower limit speed -(G-03)〜(G-3)
0.000〜1.000
Analog input 0 limit voltage
0 : Output voltage
Analog output selection
1 : Output current
2 : Torque command
3 : Motor speed
4 : Speed command
5 : Super block output
6 : Calibration
7 : Internal monitor

340 V
680 V
1900 r min-1900 r min
100 %
100 %
ON
150 %
105 %
OFF
100 r min-100 r min
OFF
OFF
0
1 ms
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00 %100.00 %1

100.00 %0.00 %
0V
1

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64S modeStandard console
LED display

Setting items

Mark of rewriting during operation: Possible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default

G-17
G-18
G-19
G-20

Analog output adjustment gain
50.0〜150.0
Analog output adjustment offset-50.0〜50.0
Speed (frequency) meter output selection 0 :1: Output frequency(6F output)
2: Motor speed(6F output)
3: Calibration (6F output)
Isolated analog input setting adjustment gain 50.00〜150.00
0 : 0〜10V
Isolated analog input setting
characteristics selection 1 : 4〜20mA
Isolated analog setting upper limit speed Absolute value of (G-13)〜100.00
Isolated analog setting lower limit speed -(G〜12)〜(G〜12)
Isolated torque command input adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0
Isolated torque command input offset adjustment quantity -50.0〜50.0
Isolated analog output selection
0: Output voltage
1: Output current
2: Torque command
3: Motor speed
4: Speed command
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: Internal monitor (for our test)
8: Output voltage (4〜20mA)
9: Output current (4〜20mA)
10: Torque command (4〜20mA)
11: Motor speed (4〜20mA)
12: Speed command (4〜20mA)
13: Super block output (4〜20mA)
14: Calibration (4〜20mA)
Isolated analog output adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0
Isolated analog output offset adjustment quantity -50.0〜50.0
Temperature correction option offset adjustment quantity -20.0〜20.0
Temperature correction option gain adjustment quantity 50.0〜150.0

H-00
H-01
H-02
H-03
H-04
H-05
H-06
H-07
H-08
H-09
H-10
H-11
H-12
H-13
H-14
H-15
H-16
H-17
H-18
H-19
H-20
H-21
H-22
H-23
H-24
H-25

(H area) Setting of relevance of programed operation / preset operation
Preset speed command 1
Preset speed command 2-max. speed〜max. speed
Preset speed command 3
Preset speed command 4
Preset speed command 5
Preset speed command 6
Preset speed command 7
Preset speed command 8
0: OFF(unused) 1: One-Time 2: End-less
Programed operation mode selection
1: min2: hour
Programed operation time unit selection 0: sec
Programed operation time 1
Programed operation time 2
0.0〜3600.0
Programed operation time 3
Programed operation time 4
Programed operation time 5
Programed operation time 6
Programed operation time 7
Programed operation time 8
Programed operation accel/decel selection 1
Programed operation accel/decel selection 2 0: Accel/decel time 1
Programed operation accel/decel selection 3 1: Accel/decel time 2
Programed operation accel/decel selection 4 2: Accel/decel time 3
Programed operation accel/decel selection 5 3: Accel/decel time 4
Programed operation accel/decel selection 6
Programed operation accel/decel selection 7
Programed operation accel/decel selection 8

G-07
G-08
G-09

G-10
G-11
G-12
G-13
G-14
G-15
G-16

: Impossible
Unit

Rewritingduringoperation

100.0 %
0.0 %2

100.00 %0100.00 %0.00 %
100.0 %
0.0 %1

100.0 %
0.0 %0.0 %10.0 %

0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

28

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64S mode
Mark of rewriting during operation
Standard console
LED display

i-00
i-01
i-02
i-03
i-04
i-05
i-06
i-07

J-00
J-01

J-02

Setting items

Setting range(selection items)(i area) Droop control, machine loss compensation
Droop control selection
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Droop start speed
0.0〜100.0
0.0〜100.0
Droop ratio changeover speed
0.0〜50.0
Droop ratio
Droop start torque
0.0〜90.0
Machine loss compensation selection
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Machine loss offset
0.0〜100.0
Machine loss inclination
0.000〜32.767(J area) Communication option setting
Use-selection of communication option 0: OFF(unused)
ASYC64 communication speed
0 : 1200bps
1 : 2400bps
2 : 4800bps
3 : 9600bps
4 : 19200bps
5 : 38400bps
0 : 125kbps
RSH64 Communication speed
1 : 250kbps
2 : 500kbps
3 : 1Mbps

1: ON(use): Possible: Impossible

Initializing
data by default Unit

OFF
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
OFF
0.0 %
0.000 %

OFF
2

3

J-03

J-05

Number of frame of commu-nication option in3〜19
put (Inverter communication master office)Number of frame of commu-nication option out2〜12
put (Inverter communication master office)

L-00
L-01

L area) 2nd motor parameter setting, 2nd speed control gainUse-selection of 2nd motor function
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)
2nd motor capacity
Rated capacity〜3 ranks lower capacity

L-02

2nd motor rated voltage

L-03
L-04
L-05

2nd motor rated current
2nd motor rated speed
2nd motor pole selection

L-06

2nd motor rated frequency

L-07
L-08
L-09
L-10
L-11
L-12
L-13
L-14
L-15
L-16
L-17
L-18
L-19
L-20

2nd motor cooling fan

2nd motor,primary resistanceSetting range differs, depending on
2nd motor,secondary resistanceInverter capacity
2nd motor leakage inductance
2nd motor mutual inductance
2nd motor inductance maturity correction 1
2nd motor inductance maturity correction 2
2nd motor iron loss conductance
0.0〜600.0
2nd motor loss factor 1
0.0〜200.0
2nd motor loss factor 2
0.0〜200.0
2nd speed control proportional gain
3〜100
2nd speed control integrated time constant 20〜10000
2nd speed control inertia moment
0.0〜32767

0 mΩ
0 mΩ
0 mH
0 mH
0%
0%
0 mΩ
0%
0%
15
40 ms
10

n-00

(n area) Monitor settingLine speed monitor adjustment

0

J-04

200V class: 140〜230
400V class: 280〜460
40〜150% of rated current
400〜12000
2〜12[Pole]
Rated speed x pole/120〜rated speed x pole/
120+7.0
0: Self cooling fan 1: Forced cooling fan

0〜20000(P area) Super block constant setting area
P-00〜259 Super block constant setting area

29

14
6

OFF
0 kW
0V

0.0 A
0 r min
4
0.0 Hz0

Rewritingduringoperation

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64S modeStandard console
LED display

S-00
S-01
S-02

Setting items(S area) Special setting items
VDC detection gain
Inverter control mode
Inverter capacity,voltage classMark of rewriting during operation: Possible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default

0.0 〜200.0 (adjusted at the time of delivery)
VF64S
VF64V
1r122〜18022
1r144〜100044: Impossible
Unit

Rewritingduringoperation%

VF64

VF64V mode
2. Table of setting items of vector control system with speed sensor (VF64V mode)Standard console
LED display

0.SrEF
1.FJoG
2.rJoG
3.Acc1
4.dEc1
5.Acc2
6.dEc2
7.ASrP
8.ASri9.ASrJ
Func

Fund
A-00
A-01
A-02
A-03
A-04
A-05
A-06
A-07
A-08
A-09
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25

Setting items(Basic setting items)
Ref(set).SPD.
For. jog speed
Rev. jog speed
Accel time (1)Decel time (1)Accel time (2)Decel time (2)Speed control proportional gain (1)Speed control integrated time constant
Speed control inertia moment
Selection of extended setting area

Mark of rewriting during operation: Possible: Impossible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default

Unit-Max. speed〜max. speed
Min. speed〜300-300〜-min. speed
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
3〜50
20〜10000
0〜32767

Rewritingduringoperation

0
24
-24
30.0
30.0
0.3
0.3
1.5
4.0 ms10

Transfer to extended setting area by [SET] key(A area) Setting of max. speed, rated value, parameter of motor
Selection of basic setting items
Transfer to basic setting items by [SET] key
300〜14700
Max. speed
Min. speed
0〜max. speed
Rated capacity〜capacity of 3 ranks down
Motor capacity
200V class: 140〜230
Motor rated voltage
400V class: 280〜460
40〜150% of rated current
Motor rated current
Motor rated speed
25〜100% of max. speed
Motor pole selection
2〜12[Pole]
Rated speed x pole/120〜rated speed x pole
Motor rated frequency/120+7.0
Number of PG(speed sensor) pulse
60〜3600
PWM carrier frequency
1.0〜15.0
Dead time compensation amount (U phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (U phase -side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (V phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (V phase -side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (W phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation amount (W phase +side) 0〜400
Motor, primary resistanceMotor, 2ndary resistanceSetting range differs,depending on
Inverter capacity
Motor leakage inductanceMotor mutual inductanceMotor inductance saturation compensation1
Motor inductance saturation compensation2
0.0〜600.0
Motor iron loss conductanceMotor loss factor 1
0.0〜200.0
0.0〜200.0
Motor loss factor 2

180000.0 kW0V
0.0 A
0r
4 Pole0.0 Hz
600 P R
6 kHz

0 mΩ
0 mΩ
0 mH
0 mH
0%
0%
0.0 mho
0.0 %
0.0 %

30

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64V modeStandard console
LED display

b-00
b-01

b-02
b-03

b-04
b-05
b-06
b-07
b-08
b-09
b-10
b-11
b-12

b-13
b-14
b-15

b-16

b-17

b-18

b-19

b-20

c-00

31

Setting items

Mark of rewriting during operation: Possible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default(b area) Selection of operation mode, operation sequence
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)0: Speed control (ASR) mode
1: Minus(-) direction of torque command has priority
2: Plus(+) direction of torque command has priority
3: Torque control (ATR) mode
4: Contact changeover of speed/torque control
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of highly efficient operation
Stop mode selection
0: Free stop
1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brake
Stop speed
0〜300
DC brake operation time
0.0〜10.0
DC brake current
20.0〜500.0 (rated excitation current = 100%)
Jog stop mode selection
0: Free stop 1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brakeJog stop speed
0〜300
3〜100
Speed control proportional gain (2)0: Speed control proportiona gain (1)Jog proportional gain selection
1: Speed control proportional gain (2)Selection of re-start function at instantaneous power failure 0: ON(use) 1: OFF(unused)
0 : OFF (ordinary)
Selection of reverse run inhibition
1 : Inhibition of rotation to reverse direction against command
2 : Inhibition of reverse rotation
Selection of regeneration stall preventive function 0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of sequence (PLC) function
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of setting position at interlocking 0: Terminal block
1: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
2: Digital communication option (RSH64)
Selection of speed command setting position 0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
4: Isolated analog input option
Selection of operation command setting position 0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
Selection of jog command setting position 0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 or SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
Selection of torque command setting position 0: Terminal block
1: Analog option
2: Digital communication option
0: AC initial excitation 1: DC initial excitation
Selection of initial excitation
Selection of HC(super block) function
Selection of operation (control) mode(c area) Relatives of multifunction input / output
Selection of multifunction input position 0: Terminal block
1: Digital communication option: Impossible
Unit

OFF
0

OFF
1

30 r min
0.0 sec
100.0 %
030 r min
15
0

OFF
0

OFF
OFF
1

0

0

0

1

1

Rewritingduringoperation

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64V mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting range (selection items)
Setting items
LED display
data by default Unit operation0c-01
Function-selection of terminal block MI1 (multi-function input 1) 0 : Preset speed command selection 11
c-02
Function-selection of terminal block MI2 (multi-function input 2) 1 : Preset speed command selection 2
3
c-03
Function-selection of terminal block MI3 (multi-function input 3) 2 : Preset speed command selection 3
4c-04
Function-selection of terminal block MI4 (multi-function input 4) 3 : Accel/decel time selection 1
c-05
7Function-selection of terminal block MI5 (multi-function input 5) 4 : Accel/decel time selection 2
14
c-06
Function-selection of terminal block MI6 (multi-function input 6) 5 : Speed up command (MRH mode)
6 : Speed down ommand (MRH mode)
7 : Speed hold8 : Inhibition of S pattern accel/decel
9 : Max.revolution reduction
10: Droop control inactive
11: Torque control selection
12: For/Rev changeover command
13: DC brake command
14: Initial excitation command
15: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A active)
16: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A active)
17: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A active)
18: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A active)
19: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
20: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
21: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
22: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
23: Trace back external trigger
24: 2nd motor selection
25: Emergency stop (B contact)
26: Advance of programed operation
27: Selection of speed command terminal block
Function-selection of terminal block MO1 (multi-function output 1) 0 : End of programed operation
7
c-07
1
Function-selection of terminal block MO2 (multi-function output 2) 1 : Speed detection (1) (speed = detection setting)c-080Function-selection of terminal block MO3 (multi-function output 3) 2 : Speed detection (1) (speed＞= detection setting)c-09
Function-selection of terminal block MO4 (multi-function output 4) 3 : Speed detection (1) (speed＜= detection setting)8c-10
4 : Speed detection (2) (speed = detection setting)
5 : Speed detection (2) (speed＞= detection setting)
6 : Speed detection (2) (speed＜= detection setting)
7 : Setting reach
8 : Torque detection
9 : Absolute value torque detection
10: During power interruption
11: Overload prealarm
12: During retry
13: During reverse run
14: Protective operation code
15: Sum check error-max. speed〜+max. speed
0 r minDetection speed (1)c-11-max. speed〜+max. speed
0 r minc-12
Detection speed (2)0 r min0〜600
c-13
Speed detection range
0%
Detection torque command (with polarity) -205〜205c-14
0%Detection torque command (absolute value) 0〜205
c-15
0〜100
50 %
Overload pre-alarm operation levelc-16
90.0 %
Speed command reduction rate
50.0〜100.0
c-17
d-00
d-01

d-02
d-03
d-04
d-05

(d area) Accel/decel setting, speed jump function, MRH function selection
Ordinary operation accel/decel selection 0 : Accel/decel time 1
1 : Accel/decel time 2
Jog operation accel/decel selection
2 : Accel/decel time 3
3 : Accel/decel time 4
0.0〜3600.0
Accel time 3
0.0〜3600.0
Decel time 3
0.0〜3600.0
Accel time 4
0.0〜3600.0
Decel time 40
1

30.0 sec
30.0 sec
30.0 sec
30.0 sec

32

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64V mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting
range (selection items)
Setting items
LED display
data by default Unit
operation
S pattern accel/decel time selection
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)d-06
OFF
0.1 sec
S pattern rise time 1
0.0〜60.0
d-07
S pattern accel reach time 1
0.0〜60.0
0.1 secd-08
S pattern fall time 1
0.0〜60.0
0.1 secd-09
S pattern decel reach time 1
0.0〜60.0
d-10
0.1 sec
S pattern rise time 2
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
d-11
S pattern accel reach time 2
0.0〜60.0
d-12
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
S pattern fall time 2
d-13
0.1 sec
S pattern decel reach time 2
d-14
0.0〜60.0
Speed deviation limit command selection 0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)OFF
d-15
0.0 〜 100.0
Plus direction deviation max. value
5.0 %
d-16
-100.0 〜 0.0-5.0 %
Minus direction deviation max. value
d-17
0 r min
Jump (1) speed
d-18
0〜max. speed
0 r min
Jump (2) speed
0〜max. speed
d-19
Jump (3) speed
0 r mind-20
0〜max. speed
Jump (4) speed
0 r mind-21
0〜max. speed
Jump speed range
0 〜3000 r min
d-22
MRH function selection
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)d-23
OFF
MRH upper limit speed
300 r mind-24
MRH lower limit speed (d-25) 〜max. speed
MRH lower limit speed
0 r mind-25-max. speed〜MRH upper limit speed (d-24)

E-00
E-01
E-02
E-03
E-04
E-05
E-06
E-07
E-08
E-09
E-10
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-14
E-15

F-00
F-01
F-02
F-03
F-04
F-05
F-06
F-07
F-08
F-09
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
F-14
F-15
F-16
F-17
F-18

33

(E area) Torque limit value, torque command characteristics, speed control,relatives of vector control
0〜200
150 %
For. powering torque limit value-200〜0-150 %
For. regeneration torque limit value-200〜0-150 %
Rev. powering torque limit value
0〜200
150 %
Rev. regeneration torque limit value-Unused0
0: % command 1: absolute value command
Torque command mode selection
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)ON
ASR cancelation selection
ON
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)
ASR feedforward selection
5.00 %
Variable proportional gain variation start speed 0.01〜100.00
100 %
0〜100
Variable proportional min. gain ratio
100.0 %
20.0〜150.0
Flux command
100.0 %
100.0〜150.0
Intensification rate of flux at starting
0.0〜9.9
3.0
Current control proportional gain
1.5 msCurrent control integrated time constant 0.0〜9.970Gain of current control feedforward component 0〜200
Use selection of motor temperature detection
OFF
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)option temperature compensation function(F area) Built-in DB operation setting, protective function, trace back setting
200V class: 320〜360V
Built-in DB operation level
400V class: 640〜720V
0〜max. speed (A-00) X 1.5
For. run side overspeed setting-max. speed (A-00) X 1.5〜0
Rev. run side overspeed setting
20〜110Overload protection setting
80〜125
FCL level adjustment
1: ON (use)Selection of overtorque protective function 0 : OFF (unused)
Overtorque protective operation level setting 110〜205
Overtorque protective operation standard torque 50〜105
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)Use-selection of speed control error
Speed control error plus side detection range 50〜500
Speed control error minus side detection range -500〜-50
selection of motor overheat protective operation 0 : OFF (unused)
Selection of protection relay (86A) operation at power failure 0 : OFF (unused)
0〜5
No. of time of protective retry
1〜100
Trace back pitch
1〜99
Trace back trigger point
0〜64
Trace back CH1 selection
0〜64
Trace back CH2 selection

1: ON (use)
1: ON (use)

340 V
680 V
1900 r min-1900 r min
100 %
100 %
ON

150 %
105 %
OFF

100 r min-100 r min
OFF
OFF
0
1 ms
80
0
0

-

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64V modeStandard console
Setting items
LED display
F-19
Trace back CH3 selection
F-20
Trace back CH4 selection
F-21
Trace back CH5 selection
F-22
Trace back CH6 selection
F-23
Trace back CH7 selection
F-24
Trace back CH8 selection
F-25
Trace back CH9 selection
F-26
Trace back CH10 selection
F-27
Trace back CH11 selection
F-28
Trace back CH12 selection
G-00
G-01
G-02

G-03
G-04
G-05
G-06

G-07
G-08
G-09

G-10
G-11
G-12
G-13
G-14
G-15
G-16

G-17
G-18
G-19
G-20

Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting range (selection items)
data by default Unit
operation
0〜64
0
0
0〜64
0
0〜64
0
0〜64
0
0〜64
0
0〜64
0〜64
0
0
0〜64
0
0〜64
0
0〜64

(G area) Analog input/output setting, gain adjustment
50.00〜150.00
Analog input +side adjustment gain
50.00〜150.00
Analog input -side adjustment gain
Analog input setting characteristics selection 0: 0〜±10V (bipolarity)
1: 0〜10V (unipolarity)
2: 4〜20mA
3: Pulse train
Analog input speed command upper limit speed Absolute value of (G−04)〜100.0
Analog input speed command lower limit speed −(G−03)〜(G−03)
0.000〜1.000
Analog input 0 limit voltage
0: Output voltage
Analog output selection
1: Output current
2: Torque command
3: Motor speed
4: Speed command
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: Internal monitor (for our test)
50.0〜150.0
Analog output adjustment gain
−50.0〜50.0
Analog output adjustment offset
Speed (frequency) meter output selection 0: PG output (Duty 1:1)
1: Output frequency (6F output)
2: Motor speed (6F output)
3: Calibration (6F output)
Isolated analog input setting adjustment gain 50.00〜150.00
Isolated analog input setting characteristics 0: 0〜10V
1: 4〜20mA
selection
Isolated analog setting upper limit speed Absolute value of (G−13)〜100.0
Isolated analog setting lower limit speed −(G−12)〜(G−12)
Isolated torque command input adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0
Isolated torque command input offset adjustment quantity −50.0〜50.0
0: Output voltage
Isolated analog output selection
1: Output current
2: Torque command
3: Motor speed
4: Speed command
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: Internal monitor (for our test)
8: Output voltage (4〜20mA)
9: Output current (4〜20mA)
10: Torque command (4〜20mA)
11: Motor speed (4〜20mA)
12: Speed command (4〜20mA)
13: Super block output (4〜20mA)
14: Calibration (4〜20mA)
Isolated analog output adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0
Isolated analog output offset adjustment quantity −50.0〜50.0
Temperature correction option offset adjustment quantity −20.0〜20.0
Temperature correction option gain adjustment quantity 50.0〜150.0

100.00 %100.00 %1

100.0 %
0.0 %
0.000 V1

100.0 %
0.0 %2

100.00 %0100.0 %
0.0 %
100.0 %
0.0 %1

100.0 %
0.0 %0.0 %100.0 %

34

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64V modeStandard console
LED display

Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting range (selection items)
data by default Unit
operation

Setting items

H-00
H-01
H-02
H-03
H-04
H-05
H-06
H-07
H-08
H-09
H-10
H-11
H-12
H-13
H-14
H-15
H-16
H-17
H-18
H-19
H-20
H-21
H-22
H-23
H-24
H-25

(H area) Setting of relatives of programed operation/ preset operation
Preset speed command 1-max. speed〜max. speed
Preset speed command 2
Preset speed command 3
Preset speed command 4
Preset speed command 5
Preset speed command 6
Preset speed command 7
Preset speed command 8
Selection of programed operation mode 0 : OFF(unused) 1: One-Time 2: End-lessSelection of programed operation time unit 0 : sec 1: min 2: hour
Programed operation time 1
0.0〜3600.0
Programed operation time 2
Programed operation time 3
Programed operation time 4
Programed operation time 5
Programed operation time 6
Programed operation time 7
Programed operation time 8
Programed operation accel/decel selection 1
Programed operation accel/decel selection 2 0 : Accel/decel time 1
Programed operation accel/decel selection 3 1 : Accel/decel time 2
Programed operation accel/decel selection 4 2 : Accel/decel time 3
Programed operation accel/decel selection 5 3 : Accel/decel time 4
Programed operation accel/decel selection 6
Programed operation accel/decel selection 7
Programed operation accel/decel selection 8

i-00
i-01
i-02
i-03
i-04
i-05
i-06
i-07

(i area) Droop control, machine loss compensation
0 : OFF (unused)
Droop control selection
0.0〜100.0
Droop start speed
0.0〜100.0
Droop ratio changeover speed
0.0〜50.0
Droop ratio
0.0〜90.0
Droop start torque
Selection of machine loss compensation 0 : OFF (unused)
0〜100
Machine loss offset
0〜100
Machine loss inclination

J-00
J-01

(J area) Communication option setting
Use-selection of communication option
ASYC64 communication speed

J-02

RSH64 communication speed

0 : OFF (unused)
0 : 1200bps
1 : 2400bps
2 : 4800bps
3 : 9600bps
4 : 19200bps
5 : 38400bps
0 : 125kbps
1 : 250kbps
2 : 500kbps
3 : 1Mbps

1: ON (use)0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min0 r min
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OFF

0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
1: ON (use)

OFF

0%
0%
1: ON (use)

OFF

2

3

J-03
J-04
J-05

L-00
L-01
L-02

35

Number of frame of communication input
3〜19(Inverter〜communication master office)Number of frame of communication output
2〜12(Inverter〜communication master office)(L area) 2nd motor parameter setting, 2nd speed control gain
0 : OFF (unused)
1: ON (use)Use-selection of 2nd motor function
2nd motor capacity
Rated capacity〜capacity of 3 ranks down
200V class: 140〜230
2nd motor rated voltage
400V class: 280〜460

14
6

OFF
0 kW
0V

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64V modeStandard console
LED display

Setting items

Mark of rewriting during operation: Possible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default Unit

40〜150% of rated current
400〜12000
2〜12[Pole]
Rated speed x pole/120 rated speed x pole/120+7.0

L-03
L-04
L-05

2nd motor rated current
2nd motor rated speed
2nd motor pole selection

L-06

2nd motor rated frequency

L-07
L-08
L-09
L-10
L-11
L-12
L-13
L-14
L-15
L-16
L-17
L-18
L-19
L-20

Number of 2nd motor PG (speed sensor) pulse 60〜3600
2nd motor, primary resistance
2nd motor, secondary resistanceSetting range differs,depending on Inverter capacity
2nd motor leakage inductance
2nd motor mutual inductance
2nd motor inductance maturity correction 1
2nd motor inductance maturity correction 2
2nd motor iron loss conductance
0.0〜600.0
2nd motor loss factor 1
0.0〜200.0
2nd motor loss factor 2
0.0〜200.0
2nd speed control proportional gain
3〜100
2nd speed control integrated time constant 20〜10000
2nd speed control inertia moment
0〜32767

n-00(n area) monitor settingLine speed monitor adjustment: Impossible
Rewritingduringoperation

0.0 A
0 r min
4
0.0 Hz
600 P R
0 mΩ
0 mΩ
0 mH
0 mH
0%
0%
0 mΩ
0%
0%
15
40 ms
10

0〜20000

0(P area) Super block constant setting area
P-00〜259 Super block constant setting area

S-00
S-01
S-02

(S area) Special setting items
VDC detection gain
Inverter control mode
Inverter capacity, voltage class

0.0〜200.00 (adjusted before delivery)
VF64S
VF64V
VF64
1r122〜18022
1r144〜100044

3. Table of setting items of V/f control system (VF64 mode)
Mark of rewriting during operation
Standard console
LED display

0.FrEF
1.FJoG
2.rJoG
3.Acc1
4.dEc1
5.Acc2
6.dEc27tbSt
8.dcbr
9.Stb
Func

Fund
A-00
A-01
A-02
A-03

Setting items(Basic setting items)
Ref(set).Frq
For. run jog frequency
Rev. run jog frequency
Accel time (1)Decel time (1)Accel time (2)Decel time (2)Torque boost level
DC brake voltage
Stabilizer quantity
Selection of extended function

Setting range(selection items)-max. frequency〜max. fre-quency
Min. frequency〜30.0-30.0〜-min. frequency
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜3600.0
0.0〜20.0
0.0〜20.0
0.0〜100.0
Transfer to extended function by [SET] key%

VF64 mode: Possible
Initializing
data by default: Impossible
Unit

Rewritingduringoperation

0.5 Hz1.0 Hz-1.0 Hz30.0 sec
30.0 sec
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %

(A area) Setting of max. speed, rated value, parameter of motor
Selection of basic setting items
Transfer to basic setting items by [SET] key
Max. frequency
60.0 Hz15.0〜400.0
Min. frequency
0.0〜10.0
0.5 HzMotor capacity
0〜Inverter rated capacity
Inverter rating kW
200
200V class: 140〜230
Motor rated voltage
V
400
400V class: 280〜460

36Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64 modeStandard console
LED display

A-04
A-05
A-06
A-07
A-08
A-09
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17

Setting items
Motor rated current
Motor rated speed
Motor pole selection
Motor rated frequency

Operation stop frequency
DC brake operation time
Re-start time
Jog stop mode selection

b-08

Stop frequency at jogging

b-09

Boost mode selection

b-17

b-18

c-00

37

0〜150% of Inverter rated current
400〜24000
2〜12[Pole]
15.0〜max. frequency (A-00)(b area) Selection of operation mode, operation sequence
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of HC(super block) function

b-04
b-05
b-06
b-07

b-16

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default: Impossible
Unit

Inverter rating A
1760 r min
4 Pole60.0 Hz

37KW or less15.0 kHz
1.0〜15.0
45kW or over10.0 kHz
1.0〜15.0
Dead time compensation (U phase +side) 0〜400
Differs -depen
Dead time compensation (U phase -side) 0〜400
ding on Inverter
Dead time compensation (V phase +side) 0〜400
capacity
Dead time compensation (V phase -side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation (W phase +side) 0〜400
Dead time compensation (W phase -side) 0〜400
Motor, primary resistanceSetting range differs,depending on Inverter capacity
0 mΩStart mode selection
Stop mode selection

b-13
b-14
b-15

: Possible

PWM carrier frequency

b-17
b-00
b-01
b-02
b-03

b-10
b-11
b-12

Mark of rewriting during operation

0: Free start 1: min. frequency start
0: Free stop
1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brake
0.0〜30.0
0.0〜10.0
0.100〜10.000
0: Free stop 1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brake
0.0〜10.0
0: Manual boost
1: Auto boost

Selection of re-start func-tion after instantaneous power failure 0: ON(use) 1: OFF(unused)
0 OFF (ordinary)
Selection of reverse run inhibition
1 Inhibition of rotation to reverse direction against command
2 Inhibition of reverse rotation
Selection of regeneration stall preventive function 0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of sequence (PLC) function
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Selection of setting position at interlocking 0: Terminal block
1: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
2: Digital communication option
Selection of frequency command
0: Interlocking
setting position
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
4: Isolated analog input option
Selection of operation command
0: Interlocking
setting position
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option
Selection of jog command setting position 0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
2: Console (SET64 and SET64OP)
3: Digital communication option(c area) Relatives of multifunction input/output
Selection of multifunction input position 0: Terminal block
1: Digital communication option

OFF
1
1

1.0 Hz0.0 sec
0.100 sec0
1.0 Hz
0
OFF
0

OFF
OFF
1

0

0

0

0

Rewritingduringoperation

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64 mode
Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Standard console
during
Initializing
Setting range (selection items)
Unit Rewriting
Setting items
LED display
operation
data by default0c-01
Function-selection of terminal block MI1 (multi-function input 1) 0: Preset frequency command selection 1
1
1:
Presetfrequency
commandselection2
c-02
Function-selection of terminal block MI2 (multi-function input 2)
3
c-03
Function-selection of terminal block MI3 (multi-function input 3) 2: Preset frequency command selection 3
c-04
4
Function-selection of terminal block MI4 (multi-function input4) 3: Accel/decel time selection 1
7c-05
Function-selection of terminal block MI5 (multi-function input 5) 4: Accel/decel time selection 2
c-06
14
Function-selection of terminal block MI6 (multi-function input 6) 5: Frequency up command (MRH mode)
6: Frequency down command (MRH mode)
7: Frequency hold
8: S pattern accel/decel inhibition
9: Max. frequency reduction
10: Droop control inactive
11:
12: For/Rev changeover command
13: DC brake command
14:
15: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A active)
16: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A active)
17: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A active)
18: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A active)
19: External failure signal 1 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
20: External failure signal 2 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
21: External failure signal 3 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
22: External failure signal 4 (protect. relay 86A inactive)
23: Trace back external trigger
24: 2nd motor selection
25: Emergency stop (B contact)
26: Advance of programed operation
27: Frequency command terminal block selection
c-07
7Function-selection of terminal block MO1 (multi-function output 1) 0: End of programed operation
c-08
1
Function-selection of terminal block MO2 (multi-function output 2) 1: Frequency detection (1) (frequency = detection setting)c-090Function-selection of terminal block MO3 (mult-ifunction output 3) 2: Frequency detection (1) (frequency＞ = detection setting)c-10Function-selection of terminal block MO4 (multi-function output 4) 3: Frequency detection (1) (frequency＜ = detection setting)8
4: Frequency detection (2) (frequency = detection setting)
5: Frequency detection (2) (frequency＞ = detection setting)
6: Frequency detection (2) (frequency＜ = detection setting)
7: Setting reach
8: Torque detection
9: Absolute value torque detection
10: During power interruption
11: Overload pre-alarm
12: During retry
13: During reverse run
14: Protective operation code
15: Sum check error
0.0 Hz-max. frequency〜+max. frequency
c-11
Detection frequency (1)-max. frequency〜+max. frequency
c-12
0.0 HzDetection frequency (2)0.0〜10.0
0.0 Hzc-13
Frequency detection range-205〜205c-14
0%Detection torque (with polarity)
c-15
0%
0〜205
Detection torque (absolute value)
c-16
0〜100
50 %
Overload pre-alarm actuation level50.0〜100.0
c-17
90.0 %
Speed command reduction rate

d-00
d-01

d-02
d-03
d-04

(d area) Accel/decel setting, speed jump function, MRH function selection
Ordinary operation accel/desel selection 0: Accel/decel time 1
1: Accel/decel time 2
Jog operation accel/desel selection
2: Accel/decel time 3
3: Accel/decel time 4
0.1〜3600.0
Accel time 3
0.1〜3600.0
Decel time 3
0.1〜3600.0
Accel time 40
1

30.0 sec
30.0 sec
30.0 sec

38

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

VF64 modeStandard console
Setting items
LED display
Decel time 4
d-05
d-06
S pattern accel/decel time selectiond-07
S pattern rise time 1
S pattern accel reach time 1
d-08
S pattern fall time 1
d-09
d-10
S pattern decel reach time 1
d-11
S pattern rise time 2
S pattern accel reach time 2
d-12
S pattern fall time 2
d-13
S pattern decel reach time 2
d-14
d-15
d-16
d-17
d-18
Jump (1) frequency
Jump (2) frequency
d-19
Jump (3) frequency
d-20
d-21
Jump (4) frequency
Jump frequency range
d-22
d-23
MRH function selectiond-24
MRH upper limit frequency
d-25
MRH lower limit frequency

E-00
E-01
E-02
E-03
E-04

E-05
E-06
E-07
E-08
E-09
E-10
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-14
E-15

F-00
F-01
F-02
F-03
F-04
F-05
F-06
F-07
F-08
F-09
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
F-14
F-15

39

Mark of rewriting during operation ○: Possible ×: Impossible
Initializing
Rewriting during
Setting range (selection items)
data by default Unit
operation
0.1〜3600.0
30.0 sec
0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)OFF
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.1 sec

0〜max. frequency
0〜max. frequency
0〜max. frequency
0〜max. frequency
0 〜10.0
0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)
MRH lower limit frequency (d-25)〜max. frequency-max. frequency〜MRH upper limit frequency (d-24)

0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 HzOFF
5.0 Hz0.0 Hz(E area) Torque limit value, torque command characteristics, speed control,relatives of vector control
150 %
0〜200
Powering side torque limit-150 %-200〜0Regeneration side torque limitON
Use-selection of powering side torque limit 0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)ON
Use-selection of regeneration side torque limit 0: OFF (unused) 1: ON (use)00: StraightV/f pattern selection
1: Square reduction
2: Bend line
200V class: 0〜230V
0V
Bend point voltage of bend line in V/f pattern
400V class: 0〜460V
0.0 HzBend point frequency of bend line in V/f pattern 0.0〜max. frequency(A−00)

3.0
1.5 ms70

0.0〜9.9
Current control proportional gain
Current control integrated time constant 0.0〜9.9
Gain of current control feedforward component 0〜200(F area) Built-in DB operation setting, protective function, trace back setting
Built-in DB operation level
200V class: 320〜360V
400V class: 640〜720V
For. run side overfrequency setting
0〜max. frequency (A-00)x1.5
Rev. run side overfrequency setting-max. frequency (A-00)x1.5〜0Overload protection setting
20〜110
FCL level adjustment
80〜125

Selection of motor overheat protective operation 0: OFF (unused)
Selection of protection relay (86A) operation at power failure 0: OFF (unused)
0〜5
Number of time of protective retry
1〜100
Trace back pitch

1: ON (use)
1: ON (use)

340 V
680 V
65.0 Hz-65.0 Hz
100 %
100 %

OFF
OFF
0
1 ms

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64 modeStandard console
LED display

F-16
F-17
F-18
F-19
F-20
F-21
F-22
F-23
F-24
F-25
F-26
F-27
F-28

G-00
G-01
G-02

G-03
G-04
G-05
G-06

G-07
G-08
G-09

G-10
G-11
G-12
G-13
G-14
G-15
G-16

G-17

Setting items
Trace back trigger point
Trace back CH1 selection
Trace back CH2 selection
Trace back CH3 selection
Trace back CH4 selection
Trace back CH5 selection
Trace back CH6 selection
Trace back CH7 selection
Trace back CH8 selection
Trace back CH9 selection
Trace back CH10 selection
Trace back CH11 selection
Trace back CH12 selection

Mark of rewriting during operation: Possible: Impossible

Setting range(selection items)

Initializing
data by default

Unit

1〜99
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64
0〜64

(G area) Analog input output setting, gain adjustment
Analog input +side adjustment gain
50.00〜150.00
Analog input -side adjustment gain
50.00〜150.00
Selection of analog input frequency
0 0〜±10V(bipolarity)
setting characteristics
1 0〜10V(unipolarity)

2 4〜20mA
3
Pulse train（0〜150kHz）
Analog input frequency command upper limit frequency Absolute value of (G-04)〜100.0
Analog input frequency command lower limit frequency -（G-03）〜（G-03）
Analog input 0 limit voltage
0.000〜1.000
Analog output selection
0: Output voltage
1: Output current
2: Operation torque3: Output frequency
4: Frequency command
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: Internal monitor
Analog output adjustment gain
50.0〜150.0
Analog output adjustment offset-50.0〜50.0
Speed (frequency) meter output selection 0:
1: Output frequency (6F output)
2: Motor speed (6F output)
3: Calibration (6F output)
Isolated analog input adjustment gain 50.00〜150.00
Isolated analog input setting
0 0〜10V
characteristics selection
1 4〜20mA
Isolated analog input upper limit frequency Absolute value of (G-13)〜100.0
Isolated analog input lower limit frequency -（G-12）〜（G-12）
Isolated torque command input adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0
Isolated torque command input offset adjustment quantity -50.0〜50.0
Isolated analog output selection
0: Output voltage
1: Output current
2: Operation torque3: Output frequency
4: Frequency command
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: (for our test)
8: Output voltage (4〜20mA)
9: Output current (4〜20mA)
10: Operation torque (4〜20mA)
11: Output frequency (4〜20mA)
12: Frequency command (4〜20mA)
13: Super block output (4〜20mA)
14: Calibration (4〜20mA)
Isolated analog output adjustment gain 50.0〜150.0

Rewritingduringoperation

80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00 %100.00 %1

100.0 %
0.0 %
0.000 V1

100.0 %
0.0 %1

100.00 %0100.0 %
0.00 %
100.0 %
0.0 %1

100.0 %

40

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64 mode
Mark of rewriting during operation
Standard console
LED display

Setting items

Setting range(selection items): Possible: Impossible

Initializing
data by default

Unit

G-18
G-19
G-20

Isolated analog output offset adjustment quantity -50.0〜50.0
Temperature correction option offset adjustment quantity -20.0〜20.0
Temperature correction option gain adjustment quantity 50.0〜150.0

0.0 %
0.0 %
10.0 %

H-00
H-01
H-02
H-03
H-04
H-05
H-06
H-07
H-08
H-09
H-10
H-11
H-12
H-13
H-14
H-15
H-16
H-17
H-18
H-19
H-20
H-21
H-22
H-23
H-24
H-25

(H area) Setting of relatives of programed operation/ preset operation
Preset frequency command 1-max. frequency max. frequency
Preset frequency command 2
Preset frequency command 3
Preset frequency command 4
Preset frequency command 5
Preset frequency command 6
Preset frequency command 7
Preset frequency command 8
Selection of programed operation mode 0: OFF(unused) 1: One-Time 2: End-less
1 : min
2 : hour
Selection of programed operation time unit 0 : sec
Programed operation time 1
Programed operation time 2
0.0〜3600.0
Programed operation time 3
Programed operation time 4
Programed operation time 5
Programed operation time 6
Programed operation time 7
Programed operation time 8
Programed operation accel/decel selection 1
Programed operation accel/decel selection 2
0: Accel/decel time 1
1: Accel/decel time 2
Programed operation accel/decel selection 3
Programed operation accel/decel selection 4
2: Accel/decel time 3
3: Accel/decel time 4
Programed operation accel/decel selection 5
Programed operation accel/decel selection 6
Programed operation accel/decel selection 7
Programed operation accel/decel selection 8

0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz0.0 Hz
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

(i area) Droop control, machine loss compensation
Droop control selection
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)0.0〜100.0
Droop start frequency
0.0〜100.0
Droop ratio changeover frequency
0.0〜50.0
Droop ratio
Droop start torque
0.0〜90.0

OFF
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %

J-00
J-01

(J area) Communication option setting
Use-selection of communication option
ASYC communication speed

OFF
2

J-02

RSH64 communication speed

i-00
i-01
i-02
i-03
i-04
i-05
i-06
i-07

0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)0 : 1200bps
1 : 2400bps
2 : 4800bps
3 : 9600bps
4 : 19200bps
5 : 38400bps
0 : 125kbps
1 : 250kbps
2 : 500kbps
3 : 1Mbps

3

J-03

J-05

Number of frame of communication input(Inverter〜communication master office) 3〜19
Number of frame of communication output(Inverter〜communication master office) 2〜12

L-00

(L area) 2nd motor parameter setting, 2nd speed control gain
0: OFF(unused) 1: ON(use)Use-selection of 2nd motor function

J-04

41

14
6

OFF

Rewritingduringoperation

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

VF64 mode
Mark of rewriting during operation
Standard console
LED display

Setting items: Possible

Setting range(selection items)

L-01

2nd motor capacity

L-02

2nd motor rated voltage

L-03
L-04
L-05
L-06
L-07
L-08
L-09
L-10
L-11
L-12
L-13
L-14
L-15
L-16
L-17
L-18
L-19
L-20

2nd motor rated current
2nd motor rated speed
2nd motor pole selection
2nd motor rated frequency

0〜Inverter rated capacity
200V class: 140〜230
400V class: 280〜460
0〜150% of rated current
400〜24000
2〜12[Pole]
15.0〜max. frequency (A-00)

2nd motor, primary resistanceSetting range differs, depending on Inverter capacity(n area) Monitor settingLine speed monitor adjustment

0〜20000

n-00: Impossible

Initializing
data by default

Unit

Rewritingduringoperation

Inverter rating kW
200
V
400
Inverter rating A
1760 r min
4
60.0 HzmΩ

0(P area) Super block constant setting area
P-00〜259 Super block constant setting area

S-00
S-01
S-02

(S area) Special setting items
VDC detection gain
Inverter control mode
Inverter capacity, voltage class

0.0〜200.0 (adjusted before delivery)
VF64S
VF64V
VF64
1r122〜18022
1r144〜100044%

42

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

4. Explanation of setting items
In VF64 Inverter, basic setting items and extended setting items of (A〜S) are available as the setting items to set parametersof each function and control.
In basic setting items, comparatively well used setting items were picked up and collected and in extended setting items of (A〜S), the other items were collected dividing into the groups of relative setting items each other.
In this Chapter, functions of VF64 Inverter are explained in order of each setting items.
some functions need setting of plural items related each other.Relevant items are explained later.
As the control mode of VF64 Inverter, following 3 modes are available.
(1) Speed sensorless vector control mode

(VF64S mode)(2) Vector control mode with speed sensor(VF64V mode)(3) V/f control mode

(VF64 mode)

Depending on the mode, a part of setting items differs.
In this Manual, the said modes are expressed and classified as shown below.
[common] ..........................................Items which are common to 3 modes of Speed sensorless vector control, Vector
control with speed sensor and V/f control.
[Vector control]...................................Items which are common to 2 modes of Speed sensorless vector control and Vector
control with speed sensor.
[V/f control] ........................................Items which are effective to V/f control only.
[Speed sensorless vector control] .....Items which are effective to Speed sensorless vector control mode only.
[Vector control with speed sensor].....Items which are effective to Vector control with speed sensor.

4-1. Basic setting items
In the basic setting items, comparatively well used items in the setting of VF64 Inverter were picked up andcollected. As detailed explanations were collected to relative setting items (A〜L), please see them also.
(Note 1) Among "Unit" in the tables, that which can be displayed by standard console are 4 kinds only of r/min, Hz,
A, V and other Units are not displayed, for which please pay attention. (Other units are displayed by Option
Console)(1) Rotation speed/ frequency setting (common)(Vector control)
Setting range(selection item)

Unit
Setting Initializing(Note 1)resolution
data

Display

Content

0.SrEF

Reference(setting)speed(Upper tier: Sensorless)(Lower tier: With sensor)-max. speed〜max.speed

1

1.FJoG

Forward jog speedmin. speed 〜300

1

12
0
24

2.rJoG

Reverse jog speed-300 〜 -min. speed

1

-24

r min
r min
r min

(V/f control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit
(Note 1)

0.FrEF

Reference(setting)Frequency-max. freq.〜max. freq.

0.1

0.5

Hz

1.FJoG

Forward jog speedmin. freq.〜 30.0

0.1

1.0

Hz

2.rJoG

Reverse jog speed-30.0〜 -min. frequency

0.1

-1.0

Hz

0.SrEF/0.FrEF
Setting in case of setting of drive speed/frequency by console. It will become effective when "console" is selected as the
speed/frequency command setting position at b-15 and b-16.(See item of Setting Item b)
1.FJoG 2.rJoG
Set jog speed/frequency at the times of forward jog and reverse jog respectively.

43

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(2) Accel/decel time setting (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

3.Acc1

Accel time 1

0.0 〜 3600.0

0.1

30.0

sec

4.dEc1

Decel time 1

0.0 〜 3600.0

0.1

30.0

sec

5.Acc2

Accel time 2

0.0 〜 3600.0

0.1

0.3

sec

6.dEc2

Decel time 2

0.0 〜 3600.0

0.1

0.3

sec

Set accel. time from 0 to max. speed/frequency (A-00) and decel. time from max. speed / frequency (A-00) to 0, respectively. VF64 Inverter has 4 kinds of accel/decel times (accel/decel times 3, 4 are d-02〜d-05) and they can be changed over by
setting or multifunction input, programed operation, etc.from external (3.Acc1, 4.dEc1 are ordinary operation and 5.Acc2,
6.dEc2 are jog operation in setting by default. For details of accel/decel times setting, please see item of Setting Item d)(3) Speed control gain (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1

15

Speed control integrated time constant 20 〜 10000

1

40

msec

Speed control inertia moment

1

10

m2

7.ASrP

Speed control proportional gain 1

8.ASri9.ASrJ3 〜 500 〜 32767

In vector control, speed control is executed by MFC control combining feedforward and cancelation using disturbance torqueobserver.
7.ASrP
Set proportional gain of speed control.
Js 1 Tis
8.ASri
Set integrated time constant equivalent of speed con- Speed command
Kp
trol by filter time constant.
Load inertia
9.ASrJ
9.ASrJ
Set inertia moment to be used for cancelation of
Proportional
gain 7.ASrP
speed control and feedforward by unit of gm 2.
FilterOrdinary, input 20〜100% of added value of"converted value of load inertia moment to motor
shaft" and "inertia moment of motor itself".
G s
In cases that gear creaks caused by large back rushof gear and belt vibrates by belt connection, make the
E-06
Motor speed
setting smaller or make no use of cancelation, feedforward
by setting of E-06, E-07.
SPEED CONTROL BLOCK

E-07
Torque command

Integrated time
constant 8.ASri(4) Torque boost level (V/f control)
Display

7.tbStSetting range(selection item)

Content
Torque boost level

0.0 〜 20.0

Set boost voltage at the time of manual boost by the ratio
to the rated voltage setting (A-03). When torque at starting time is short, it can be increased by making large thestarting current through making large this setting.
(See Setting item b: boost mode selection, Setting item E:
V/f pattern setting also.

Setting Initializing
resolution data
0.1

0.0

Unit
%

Output voltage
A-03 (motor
rated voltage)Note) This function is ineffective when auto-boost is selected.
7.tbStA-07 (motor rated frequency)

Outputfrequency

TORQUE BOOST CHARACTERISTICS

44

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(5) DC brake amount (V/f control)
Display

8.dcbrSetting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0.0 〜 20.0

DC brake voltage

0.1

0.0

Unit
%

Set the voltage at the time of DC braking by ratio to the rated voltage setting (A-03). When higher braking power by DC
brake is required, make this setting large.

However, please pay attention since there may be a case of operation of over-load protection if too much current is flown. (See item of DC brake of setting item b also)(6) Stabilizer (adjustment for stabilization) (V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

0.0 〜 100.0

Stabilizing amount

9.Stb

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0.1

0.0

Unit
%

When motor running becomes unstable, it can be stabilized by adjustment of this setting. Operate Inverter by frequency,
which makes motor running unstable, and increase stabilizing amount gradually until motor running becomes stable. (Pay attention since running may become unstable if stabilizing amount is increased too much)(7) Selection of extended function setting (common)
Display

Func

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

(If [SET] key is pressed here, display
turns to "Fund" and by↑↓keys, itemof Setting Items A〜P can be selected)

Selection of extended function

By pressing of [SET] key in the status of display of selection of this item, display turns to Fund and it becomes possible to set
the extended function setting item (setting item A〜setting item P).

4-2. Setting Item A : Setting of max. speed, rated value, parameter of moter
This item is the area to set the parameter of motor, which becomes necessary in order for VF64 Inverter to executecontrol. Surely set conforming to the motor and system to be used, before operation of VF64 Inverter. A-11〜A-25
are set automatically by execution of auto-tuning. Make auto-tuning combining with motor to be used before regular
operation and set each data of A-11〜A-25.
(1) Max., min. speed/frequency of motor (common)(Vector control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

A-00

Max. speed

300 〜 14700

1

A-01

Min. drive speed(upper tier: sensorless) (lower tier: with sensor)

12〜max. speed (A-00)
0〜max. speed (A-00)

1

1800
12
0

Unit

r min
r min

(V/f control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

A-00

Max. frequency

15.0 〜 400.0

0.1

60.0

Hz

A-01

Min. drive frequency

0.0 〜 10.0

0.1

0.5

Hz

A-00
(Vector control) Set the max. speed (absolute value) of motor. Inverter controls the speed making this setting as 100% (standard). Make setting in the range of 1〜4 times of the rated speed of motor to be used. In case of use of motor with speed ofless than its rated speed only, set the rated speed of motor for setting of max. speed. (However, never set larger value than
240Hz equivalent of frequency conversion (14400 at 2 pole, 7200 at 4 pole, 2400 at 6 pole times respectively.
(V/f control) Set the max. frequency (absolute value) of motor. Inverter controls the frequency making this setting as 100%(standard). Set higher value than the rated frequency of motor to be used.

45

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(Vector control) Set the min. speed of motor. Even if speed command is inputted at less than this speed in absolute value,
speed is limited to this value in the case of speed control. (However, this is ineffective at the times of torque control and ofuse of super block function)(V/f control) Set the min. frequency of motor. In case that [min. frequency start] is selected at b-02 (start mode selection), output frequency starts from this frequency.
(2) Setting of motor rating plate values (common)
Display

A-02

A-03

Content

Motor capacity

Setting range
Setting Initializing(selection item)
resolution data(can set capacity from Inverter rated one till
(vector control)
0.0
capacity of 3 ranks down in capacity of VF64)

0.1(V/f control)

0〜Inverter rated capacity(vector control)

140〜230 (200V class)280〜460 (400V class)Motor rated voltage

Inverterrating

A-05
A-06
A-07

(V/f control)

0〜150% of Inverter rating current(vector control) 25〜100% of max. speed(V/f control)
400〜24000
2〜12[Pole]
Motor pole selection
Rated speed x pole/120(vector control)〜rated speed x pole/120+7.0
Motor rated frequency
15.0〜max. frequency(A-00)(V/f control)
Motor rated speed

0.1

V

200V
400V
0.0

(vector control) 40〜150% of Inverter rating current
Motor rated current

kW

0

1

(V/f control)

A-04

Unit

A

Inverterrating

1

0.1

0
1760
4

r min

Pole

0.0

Hz

60.0

Note) At the time of initializing in V/f control, typical value of same motor capacity with Inverter capacity is set.
For the items of A-02〜A-07, set each rating value describedin motor rating plate and data sheet. As these settings areused at the time of vector control and auto-tuning (automeasuring of constant), surely set them before auto-tuning.
(If auto-tuning is done without setting, setting error (SEtO) is
displayed.
Set each value described in motor rating plate as per Fig.
right and in data sheet of motor.

Set the values described in
rating plate of motor to be used.

Ratingplate(Vector control) Less than motor rated speed is control
area of torque constant an more than rated speed is control
area of power constant.
(V/f control) V/f characteristics become motor rated voltage(A-03) at the time of motor rated frequency (A-07). In the
Output voltage
frequency of more than rated frequency (A-07), rated voltage becomes constant at motor rated voltage (A-03).
A-03 (motor

Rating plate of motor

rated voltage)

A-07(motor rated frequency)

Outputfrequency

V/f CHARACTERISTICS

46

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(3) Selection of motor cooling fan (sensorless vector control)
Display

A-08

Content
Selection of motor cooling fan

Setting range(selection item)
0: self cooling fan
1: forced cooling fan

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

0

A-08 correct the variation of motor constant caused by temperature change of the inside of motor. Select 1 (forced coolingfan) in case that motor cooling fan is drived by another fan motor. Select 0 (self cooling fan) in case of cooling by fan connected directly with motor shaft (cooling by rotation of motor itself).
(4) Setting of number of PG(speed sensor) pulse (vector control with sensor)
Display

A-09

Setting range(selection item)

Content
No. of PG pulse

Setting Initializing
resolution data

1

60 〜 3600

600

Unit

P R

A-09 set the number of pulse of PG, which is connected directly with shaft of motor to be used.
(5) Setting of carrier frequency (common)
Display
Note)

A-10

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Carrier frequency

1.0〜 15.0

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0.1

6.0
15.0
10.0

Unit

kHz

Note) This is modulated carrier frequency of voltage output PWM of Inverter.
As to figures of initializing data, upper tier is at the time of vector control, middle tier is 37kW or less at V/f control and lower
tier is 45kW or over at V/f control.
(Vector control) Set 6kHz ordinary. In case of setting at 9kHz or over in the types of Inverter capacity 37kW or less and at
6kHz or over in the types of Inverter capacity 45kW or over, please contact us since it is necessary to use lowering the Inverter rated current.
(V/f control) Set 15kHz in the types of Inverter capacity 37kW or less and 10kHz in the types of Inverter capacity 45kW orover ordinary. In case of setting at 10kHz or over in the types of Inverter capacity 45kW or over, please contact us since it isnecessary to use lowering the Inverter rating current.
(common) In case that carrier frequency is changed, it is necessary to do auto-tuning (DC mode) since a part of constantmust be re-adjusted, for which please pay attention. (See explanation of auto-tuning)(6) Electrical constant of motor, Inverter (common)
Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Display

Content

A-11
A-12

Dead time compensation amount U+

0〜 4001

Dead time compensation amount U-

0〜 400

1

A-13
A-14

Dead time compensation amount V+

0〜 4001

Dead time compensation amount V-

0〜 400A-15

Dead time compensation amount W+

0〜 4001
1

A-16

Dead time compensation amount W-

0 〜 400

1

A-17

Primary resistance(Depending on Inverter capacity,setting range and resolution differ)

Unit

Note) In case of initialization by V/f control mode, typical value is set for initializing data depending on capacity. (However, reset by auto-tuning to the utmost since actual value differs depending on individual Inverter and motor)
In vector control mode, all are initialized to 0.

47

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(vector control)
Display

A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
A-25

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

2ndary resistance
Leakage inductance
Mutual inductanceSetting range and resolution differ,depending on Inverter capacity

Inductance saturation compensation 1
Inductance saturation compensation 2
Iron loss conductance
Loss factor 1
Loss factor 2

0.0〜600.0
0.0〜200.0
0.0〜200.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0

Unit

m
mH
mH
%
%

mho
%
%

(Vector control)
A-17〜A-25 are electrical and mechanical constants of Inverter and motor to be used for operation of vector control. Thesesettings are automatically set by execution of auto-tuning.
A-11〜A-16 are dead time compensation amount of switching element(IGBT element) in the Inverter and it compensate influence to the flux operation. As there are elements at +side, -side of U, V, W phases respectively, dead time compensation
amount is also prepared for 6 elements individually. By execution of auto-tuning, the most suitable compensation amount foreach element are set.
A-17〜A-23 are electrical parameters in the motor and they are used for operation of vector control. Please set them by autotuning.
Inductance saturation compensation 1, 2 are increased amount (%) from mutual inductance at the time of 100% flux in casethat each flux is 90% and 70%.
A-24〜A-25 are factors to show electrical and mechanical loss of motor itself, which are measured and operated by auto-tuning.
(V/f control)
A-11〜A-16 are used for compensation to output voltage deviation caused by dead time of switching element (IGBT element)in the Inverter and used for operation of auto-boost.Typical value is set by initializing but compensation value of more suitablefor each element of Inverter unit to be used, is set by execution of auto-tuning.
A-17 is resistance value between primary winding of motor and wiring of motor-Inverter.
It is used for operation of auto-boost, which automatically compensates voltage drop caused by this resistance component.
Also, it is used for operation of torque. Typical value is set by initializing but compensation value of more suitable for each element is set by execution of auto-tuning.
(7) Auto-tuning (automatic measurement of constant) (common)
VF64 Inverter has auto-tuning function, which sets electrical constant of motor and Inverter automatically. By autotuning, data of A-11〜A-25 and correction table memorized in the Inverter are set automatically.
In auto-tuning, 2 kinds (full mode and DC mode) are available.
Note) Without execution of auto-tuning and even if the result of auto-tuning executed by other Inverter is set in A-11〜
A-25, Inverter cannot be operated since correction table is not set. In such case, Inverter can be operated by execution of auto-tuning of DC mode after setting of A-11〜A-25. Also, in case of replacement of control P.C.Board causedby trouble, etc., all data including individual table can be copied by using of setting copy function (option console).
A) Full mode auto-tuning (vector control)
A-11〜A-25 and all of internal correction table are measured automatically.
At the time of tuning, motor runs until about the rated speed. Disconnecting the motor from load machine, executeauto-tuning in the status of motor alone.
B) DC mode auto-tuning (common)
A-11〜A-17 (dead time compensation amount, motor primary resistance) and internal correction table only are measured automatically. Since test is executed by DC current, motor does not run (in case of status of motor alone, there
may be a case of very slow run of motor). Therefore, test can be executed even in case that it is difficult to separate
the load machine. DC mode auto-tuning is used in cases that (1) data of A-18〜A-25 are known in advance and (2)wiring was changed after full mode atuo-tuning (since wiring resistance is operated as a part of primary resistance,
primary resistance varies on appearance when wiring is changed) and (3) setting of carrier frequency was changed.
(For risk prevention, tuning should be done braking the load machine side.

48

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

C) Order of auto-tuning (common)(In case of full mode) (vector control)
1) Disconnecting the motor from load machine, connect it with Inverter.
2) Turn on the power of Inverter and set the setting of A-00〜A-10 from motor rating plate,etc.
3) Once turn off the power and open the cover. Set No.6 of DIP switch SW-1 on the control VFC64-P.C.Board of Inverter at ON.
4) Turn on the power again. ("tun" is displayed in console)5) When console [JOG] key is pressed, auto-tuning starts. ("tunst" is displayed)
As motor runs at this time, please be careful.
6) By several minutes (time differs depending on capacity), tuning ends. ("tuned" is displayed in console)7) Turn off the power of Inverter and return No.6 of DIP-SW1 to OFF.
8) Turning on the power, confirm that the data were set at each setting of A-11〜A-25.
(In case of DC mode) (common)
1) Connect the motor with Inverter.
2) Turn on the power of Inverter and set the setting of A-00〜A-10 from motor rating plate, etc.
3) Once turn off the power and open the cover. Set Nos. 5 and 6 of DIP-SW1 on the control VFC64-P.C.Board of Inverter at ON. (in case of V/f control, mode turns to DC mode by setting of No.6 only of DIP-SW1)
4) Turn on the power again. ("tund" is displayed in console)5) When console [JOG] key is pressed, auto-tuning starts. ("tunst" is displayed)
As current flows to motor at this time, please be careful.
6) By several minutes (time differs depending on capacity), tuning ends. ("tunEd" is displayed in console)7) Turn off the power of Inverter and return No.5 and 6 of DIP-SW1 to OFF.
8) Turning on the power, confirm that the data were set at each setting of A-11〜A-17.
(Error during tuning) (common)
If error occurred during tuning, error indication is displayed in console and Inverter stops.
●

When SEtO is displayed :Setting error of A-00〜A-10 can be presumed. Revise the setting and redo from the beginning.

●

When tun-- is displayed:This shows that there is an error in the result of tuning. Confirm setting of A-00〜A-10, wiring between Inverter andmotor, and whether load is not connected with motor (full mode only) and redo.

●

Other protective indication:
It shows the operation of protective function during auto-tuning. Eliminate the cause and redo from the beginning.

4-3. Setting Item b Selection of operation mode, operation sequence
Selection of HC(super block) function (common)
Display

Content

b-00

Selection of HC(super block) function

Setting range(selection item)

0
1

OFF
ON

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

OFF

For using of HC(super block) function, setting should be ON. Usually, set at OFF.
As to details of HC(super block) function, see Manual [Super Block Editor].
(2) Selection of operation mode (speed control/ torque control) (vector control)
Displayb-01

Content
Selection of operation mode

Setting range
Setting
Initializing(selection item)
resolution data
0: Speed control mode
1: -direction of torque command takes priority
02:+direction of torque command takes priority
3: Torque control mode
4: Contact-changeover of speed/torque control

Unit

Select operation mode (speed control/ torque control/ priority). Combining with multifunction input, it is possible tochangeover by external contact.

49

Chapter 3

Speedsetting

Explanation of function setting items

Speed control-direction
takes priority+direction
takes priority
Torquecontrol
Contactchangeover

Speed
control part

TorquecommandTorquecontrol part

Select bysetting item b-01
Changeover bymultifunction input

SELECTION OF OPERATION MODE
(3) Selection of highly efficient operation mode (vector control)
Display

Content

b-02

Selection of highly efficient operation

Setting range(selection item)

01

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

OFF
ON

Unit

OFF

At the time of light load, execute highly efficient operation adjusting excitation current command automatically. (As responsiveness is damaged, set at OFF in the application which requires high speed response)(4) Selection of start mode (V/f control)
Content

Display

Setting range(selection item)

b-02

Start mode selection

0: Free start
1: Min. frequency start

b-06

Re-start time

0.100〜10.000

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

Unit

1
0.001

0.100

sec

By b-02, select start mode. By b-06, set re-start time after stop of Inverter. Until passing over of this time, Inverter does not
re-start even if operation signal is turned to ON.
Note) In case of free start of comparatively large capacity motor, free start may fail caused by residual flux remained in motor
if motor is re-started just after operation.
In such case, elongate re-start time of b-06 and adjust. In case that Inverter operation is turned to OFF by frequency of lessthan 1/10 of max. frequency, Inverter output current starts from min. frequency even if free start is selected for next start time.
Min. frequency startFree start

When operation command is turned to ON during free run of Regardless of running of motor, Inverter starts from min. opmotor, Inverter starts from frequency synchronized with mo- eration frequency (A-01). (In case of re-starting after instantor speed.
taneous power failure, output current re-starts from operation frequency of just before detection of power failure)

Operation command

Operation command

Output current

Output current
free runfree run
Motor speed

Motor speed

50Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(5) Selection of stop mode (common)
Display

b-03

b-04

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Stop mode selection

0: Free stop
1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brake

Stop frequency(at the time of sensorless vector control, V/f control)

0.0〜30.0

Stop speed(vector control with sensor)

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1

Min. speed〜300

0.1

1.0

Hz

1

30

r min

b-05

DC brake operating time

0.0〜10.0

0.1

0.0

sec

b-06

DC brake current (vector control only)

20〜500 (rated excitation current = 100%)

1

100

%

b-07

Jog stop mode selection

0: Free stop
1: Decel stop
2: Decel stop with DC brakeb-08

Jog stop frequency(at the time of sensorless vector control, V/f control)
Jog stop speed(vector control with sensor)

0

0.0〜30.0

0.1

1.0

Hz

Min. speed〜300

1

30

r min

Settings b-03 and b-07 select activation in case of turning to OFF of operation command / jog command. (In case that b-01 is
set at other point than 0(speed control) in vector control, motor always becomes "Free Stop" regardless of setting of Settingsb-03 and b-07.
Decel stop with DC brake

Decel stop

Free stop

Output voltage stops when operation Output voltage stops after deceleration Make DC braking for the time of b-05
command/jog command are turned to in accordance with decel. time until the after deceleration in accordance withOFF.
speed of b-04/b-08.
decel. time until speed of b-04/b-08.
(vector control) Adjust current at thetime of DC braking, by b-06.
(V/f control) Adjust current at the timeof DC braking, by 8.dcbr.
Operation/jog
commandOperation/jog
commandOperation/jog
command

Output current

Output current

Output current

b-06
8.dcbrb-05

Free runb-04 b-08

Motor speed

Motor speed

b-04 b-08

Motor speed(6) Change of speed control gain at jog time (vector control)
Display

b-09
b-10

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Speed control proportional gain (2)3 〜 100

Proportional gain selection at jog time

0: speed control proportional gain (1)1: speed control proportional gain (2)Setting
Initializing
resolution data

1

Unit

15
0

When other proportional gain than that of ordinary operation is used at jog time, select (2) for speed control proportional gainby proportional gain selection (b-10) at jog time. At jog time, make speed control by proportional gain (2) of b-09, instead ofproportional gain of basic setting item [7.ASrP].

51

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(7) Selection of boost mode (V/f control)
Displayb-09

Setting range(selection item)
0: Manual boost
1: Auto-boost

Content
Boost mode selection

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

0

Depending on the motor and load characteristics, following 2 boost modes are selectable.
Manual boost

Auto-boost

Conforming to the characteristics of motor load, adjust boost Depending on the load, adjust boost level automatically. (Setlevel by 7.tbSt. (At the time of multi-motors drive, selectting of 7.tbSt becomes ineffective) Since dead time compenmanual boost)sation amount and primary resistance are necessary to be set
accurately, execute auto-tuning (see setting item A) at thetime of use. This is not usable in case of multi-motors drive)
Output voltage

Output voltage

A-03 (motor
rated voltage)

A-03 (motor
rated voltage)
Loadincrease

No loadtb

A-07(motor rated frequency)

Outputfrequency

A-07(motor rated frequency)

Outputfrequency(8) Setting of operation at re-starting after instantaneous power failure (common)
Displayb-11

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of re-starting after instantaneous power failure

0
1

ON
OFF

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

OFF

If instantaneous power failure occurred, operation stops temporarily and after that, select transaction after re-supply of power.
OFF: Even after re-supply of power, operation does not start (Inverter keeps stopping). For re-starting of operation, it is necessary to turn operation (jog) command to OFF once and to turn again to ON.
ON : After re-supply of power, operation re-starts automatically. However, operation command to Inverter is necesary to beheld at ON in case that Inverter is operated by contact signal or command of digital option.
(9) Setting of rev. run inhibition function (common)
Displayb-12

Content
Selection of reverse run inhibition

Setting range(selection item)
0: OFF (ordinary)
1: Inhibition of rotation to reverse
direction against command
2: Inhibition of reverse rotation

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

0

Reverse run is inhibited.
1) Ordinary operation (b-12=0)This is ordinary operation. There is no limit in both forward and reverse operation.
2) Inhibition of rotation to rev. direction against command (b-12=1)
Inhibit rotation to reverse direction against direction of operation command at the time of Inverter starting. (Once Inverter
started, rotation to reverse direction against direction of command at the time of starting is inhibited until stop of Inverter.
Even if forward run operation command and reverse run operation command are exchanged after starting, direction ofrotation does not change unless Inverter is stopped)

52

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(vector control)
At the time of speed control
In case that speed command input is +side In case that speed command input is -side

At the time of
torque control

Starts by for. run operation command Operates to for. run

Limit to min. speed of for. run side Limit output frequency of rev. run side to 0

Starts by rev. run operation command Operates to rev. run

Limit to min. speed of rev. run side Limit output frequency of for. run side to 0

(V/f control)
In case that frequency command input is +side In case that frequency command input is -side
Starts by for. run operation command Operates to for. run

Limit to min. operation frequency of for. run side

Starts by rev. run operation command Operates to rev. run

Limit to min. operation frequency of rev. run side3)Inhibition of reverse run operation
Regardless of direction of operation command, inhibit operation to reverse run direction (when phase sequence of Inverter
output voltage is U→V→W, direction of rotation is regarded as forward run ) of motor. Limit speed command (frequency
command) to reverse run direction to 0.
Note) When［Inhibition of operation to reverse direction against cmmand］or［Inhibition of reverse run opration］is selected,
there is a case of deterioration of speed control characteristics since frequency is limited in the area of low speed.
In such case, select OFF (ordinary)(10) Setting of regeneration stall prevention function (common)
Displayb-13

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Regeneration stall prevention function

0
1

Setting Initializing
resolution data

OFF
ON

Unit

OFF

(vector control) In case that DC voltage increased exceeding [DB operation level (F-00) + 5V (10V in case of 400V)], trip byactuation of overvoltage protection (0V) can be prevented by limiting the torque command of regeneration side (-direction at
the time of forward run and +direction at the time of reverse run) to 0 (by stopping of deceleration once if during deceleration).
(V/f control) In case that DC voltage increased exceeding [DB operation level (F-00) + 5V (10V in case of 400V)], trip by actuation of overvoltage protection (0V) can be prevented by stopping of deceleration once if during deceleration.
(11) Selection of sequence function (common)
Displayb-14

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of sequence function

0
1

Setting Initializing
resolution data

OFF
ON

Unit

OFF

Select use of sequence function incorporated in VF64 Inverter.
As to details of sequence function, see [Sequence Manual].
(12) Selection of setting positions of speed/frequency, operation, jog command （common)
Display

b-15

b-16

b-17
b-18

Content

Setting range(selection item)

0: terminal block
1: Console (SET64)
2: Digital communication option
0: Interlocking
Selection of speed command setting
position (vector control)
1: Terminal block
Selection of frequency command setting 2: Console (SET64)
position (V/f control)
3: Digital communication option
4: Isolated analog input option
Selection of operation command setting position 0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
Selection of jog command setting position
2: Console (SET64)
3: Digital communication option
Selection of setting position atinterlocking

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1

0

0
0

(Select setting positions of speed (frequency), operation, jog command. These setting positions can be set en bloc by settingof b-15. Selection position of each command by combination of settings of b-15〜b-18 are as per Table of next page.

53

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Selection of setting positions at interlocking (b-15)

0: Interlocking
1: Terminal block
Speed/frequency
command
2: Console(SET64)(b-16 setting)

0: Terminal block

1: Console

2: Digital communication option

VFC64TB-P.C.Board+10] or [4-20] terminal[0--

Console [0.SrEF] setting[0.FrEF]setting

Speed command bycommunication

VFC64TB-P.C.Board+10] or [4-20] terminal[0--

VFC64TB-P.C.Board+10] or [4-20] terminal[0--

VFC64TB-P.C.Board+10] or [4-20] terminal[0--

Console [0.SrEF] setting,[0.FrEF] setting

Console [0.SrEF] setting,[0.FrEF] setting

Console [0.SrEF] setting,[0.FrEF] setting

3: Digital communication option Command by communication Command by communication Command by communication

Operationcommand(b-17 setting)

4: Isolated analoginput

ISO64, IO64 option

ISO64, IO64 option

ISO64, IO64 option

0: Interlocking

VFC64 P.C.Board[ST-F],[ST-R] terminal

Console[START], [FOR/REV] key

Operation command bycommunication

1: Terminal block

VFC64 P.C.Board[ST-F],[ST-R] terminal

VFC64 P.C.Board[ST-F],[ST-R] terminal

VFC64 P.C.Board[ST-F],[ST-R] terminal

2: Console(SET64)

Console[START],[FOR/REV]key

Console[START],[FOR/REV]key

Console[START],[FOR/REV]key

3: Digital communication
optionOperation command bycommunication

Operation command bycommunication

Operation command bycommunication

0: Interlocking

VFC64 P.C.Board[JOG-F],[JOG-R] terminal

Console[JOG],[FOR/REV] key

Jog command bycommunication

VFC64 P.C.Board[JOG-F],[JOG-R] terminal

VFC64 P.C.Board[JOG-F],[JOG-R] terminal

VFC64 P.C.Board[JOG-F],[JOG-R] terminal

Console[JOG],[FOR/REV] key

Console[JOG],[FOR/REV] key

Console[JOG],[FOR/REV] key

Jog command bycommunication

Jog command bycommunication

Jog command bycommunication

Jog command 1: Terminal block(b-18 setting)
2: Console(SET64)
3: Digital communication
option+10] terminal block (0〜+10V voltage input
・In case that speed command is inputted from terminal block, changeover of [0-+or 0〜 10V voltage input) and [4-20] terminal block (4〜20mA current input) is performed by G-02 setting. (By default, [0++10V voltage input:uni-polarity) is selected)-10](0〜・In case that super block function use selection (b-00) is set at ON, speed command is outputted from super block function,
regardless of this selection.
・In case that sequence function use selection (b-14) is set at ON, operation/jog command is outputted from sequence function, regardless of this setting.
(13) Selection of torque command setting position (vector control)
Content

b-19

Selection of torque command setting position

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0: Terminal block
1: Analog option
2: Digital communication option

Select setting position of torque command at the time of torque control mode.
+10] terminal.
Terminal block : Input from VFC64TB-P.C.Board [0-Analog option: Input from terminal of ISO64 option.
Digital communication option: Torque command by communication.
Torque command characteristic in case of input from terminal block and analog
option is as per Fig. right.
+10] terminal input is aNote) Since detection speed of VFC64TB-P.C.Board[0-bit slow (1ms each), use analog option in case of use in application which
requires high speed response.

Unit

1

Torque command

Input voltage

Torque Command Input Characteristic

54

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(14) Mode selection at the time of initial excitation (vector control with sensor)
Display

b-20

Content
Selection of initial excitation

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0: AC initial excitation
1: DC initial excitation

Unit

1

Select the mode at the time of initial excitation.
AC initial excitation : If motor runs during initial excitation, frequency is varied conforming to the speed of motor in order not to
output the torque.
DC initial excitation : Even if motor runs during initial excitation, DC of excitation component is held.
Note) In sensorless vector control, AC initial excitation mode cannot be selected.
Initial excitationcommand

Initial excitationcommandMotor speed(in case was made rotationfrom load side)

Motor speed(in case was made rotationfrom load side)

Output current

AC initial excitation mode

55

Output current

DC initial excitation modeChapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

4-4. Setting item c Relatives of multifunction input/output(1) Multifunction input (common)
Display

Content

c-00

Multifunction input position selection

c-01

Terminal block MI1 (multifunction
input 1) function selection
Terminal block MI2 (multifunction
input 2) function selection

c-02
c-03

Terminal block MI3 (multifunction
input 3) function selection

c-04

Terminal block MI4 (multifunction
input 4) function selection
Terminal block MI5 (multifunction
input 5) function selection
Terminal block MI6 (multifunction
input 6) function selection

c-05
c-06

Setting range(selection item)
0: Terminal block
1: Digital communication option
0: Preset speed command selection 1
1: Preset speed command selection 2
2: Preset speed command selection 3
3: Accel/decel time selection 1
4: Accel/decel time selection 2
5: Speed UP command (MRH mode)
6: Speed DOWN command (MRH mode)
7: Speed hold
8: S pattern accel/decel inhibition
9: Max. frequency reduction
10: Droop control inactive
11: Torque control selection
12: For/Rev changeover command
13: DC brake command
14: Initial excitation command
15: External failure signal 1(protection relay active)
16: External failure signal 2(protection relay active)
17: External failure signal 3(protection relay active)
18: External failure signal 4(protection relay active)
19: External failure signal 1(protection relay inactive)
20: External failure signal 2(protection relay inactive)
21: External failure signal 3(protection relay inactive)
22: External failure signal 4(protection relay inactive)
23: Trace back external trigge
24: 2nd motor selection
25: Emergency stop (B contact)
26: Programed operation advance
27: Speed command terminal block selection

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

0
0
1
3
4
7
14

Set input signal to multifunction input.
If c-00 is set at 1, bit signal input from digital communication option is selected for input signal to each function of following
multifunction input.If c-00 is set at 0, terminal blocks MI1〜MI6 on VFC64TB-P.C.Board are set as input signal terminal
blocks to each function of multifunction input to be set by c-01〜c-06.(input of function which is not selected on any terminal
block is regarded as OFF)Note) However, in case that sequence function use selection (b-14) is set at ON, aforesaid setting is disregarded and terminal blocks [MI1]〜[MI6] on VFC64TB-P.C.Board become input terminals to sequence function. At this time, each function offollowing multifunction input is controled by output of sequence function.

56

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

Multifunction input items (In V/f control, [speed] in the Table below is to be converted to [frequency].
Explanation of function

items

By use of 3 inputs of preset speed command selections 1〜3, it is possible to operate, selecting speed
Preset speedcommand selection setting of preset speed command 1〜7.
(Preset speed and programed operation speed are common. However, preset speed command 8 is for
programed operation only and cannot be used for preset)
PresetPresetPresetspeed selection 3 speed selection 2 speed selection 1

Accel/decel time
selection

Speed command

OFF

OFF

OFF

as per standard selection(preset is not used)

OFF

OFF

ON

H-00 (preset speed command 1)

OFF

ON

OFF

H-01 (preset speed command 2)

OFF

ON

ON

H-02 (preset speed command 3)

ON

OFF

OFF

H-03 (preset speed command 4)

ON

OFF

ON

H-04 (preset speed command 5)

ON

ON

OFF

H-05 (preset speed command 6)

ON

ON

ON

H-06 (preset speed command 7)

By use of input of accel/decel time selection 1〜2, it is possible to changeover accel/decel time during
operation. (In case of use of S pattern accel/decel, it is necessary to set d-06(S pattern accel/decel
use selection) at ON)
Accel/decel
Accel/decel
Accel/decel time to be selected (including S pattern accel/decel)
time selection 2 time selection 1
OFF

OFF

Standard (accel/decel time selected by d-00)

OFF

ON

Accel/decel time 2 (5.Acc2, 6.dEc2 and d-11〜14)

ON

OFF

Accel/decel time 3 (d-02, d-03 (no S pattern accel/decel))ON

ON

Accel/decel time 4 (d-04, d-05 (no S pattern accel/decel))

Speed UP/DOWN Turn d-23 (MRH function use secommand (MRH lection) to ON and by selection ofStartterminal block at speed commandmode)
position by b-15 and b-16, it becomes possible to accel/decel the Speed UP command
speed by Speed UP/DOWN Command. (However, speed is limited Speed DOWN commandat d-24 and d-25 (MRH upper, lower limit speeds). In case that speed d24-MRH upper limit speed
exceeded upper/lower limit,
Inverter accelerates/decelerates toupper/lower limit automaticallyd25-MRH lower limit speed
without UP/DOWN command. By
setting the minus value at lower
limit speed, it becomes possible to Motor speed
execute for/rev operation)
Speed hold

When this signal is turned to ON
during accel/decel of Inverter, itsuspends accel/decel once and Start
holds the speed at that time.
Speed holdIf that signal is turned to OFF, accel/decel is restarted. (However,"hold" is ineffective during decel
stop by stop command)
Speed setting
Motor speed

S pattern accel/decel inhibition

57

Even in case that S pattern accel/decel operation is performed turning d-06 (use selection of S pattern accel/decel selection), S
pattern accel/decel can be inhibited forcedly and be changed to ordinary accel/decel by turning this signal to ON.

Chapter 3

Explanation of function

items
Max. speed reduction In case that terminal block is selected at speedcommand setting position, speed command isreduced based on setting of c-17 (max. speed
reduction rate) by turning of this signal to ON
as shown in Fig, right.
This signal changes over ON/OFF during stopof Inverter. Even if Inverter is tried to changeover during operation, it is not performed until
operation stop once. (This function is effective
for analog input only from terminal block)Droop control
inactive

Explanation of function setting items

Motor speed

G-03 upper limit of analog setting

ON time of max. speed
reduction
reduction rate %Speed setting

Even though i-00 (droop function use selection) was turned to ON, droop control is inactive if this signal
is turned to ON. (as to droop control, see item of Setting Item i)

When b-01 (control mode selection) is set at 4 (contact changeover of speed/torque control), speed
Torque control
control and torque control can be changed over by this signal. Speed control by OFF and torque control
selection(vector control only) by ON. (See item of Setting Item b)
For/Rev changeover If this signal is turned to ON, For/Rev run of operation/jog command is changed over. (For. run → Rev.
run, Rev. run → For. run)command
If this signal is turned to ON, it becomes DC brake which flows DC current to motor. The current at this time can
DC brakecommand be adjusted by b-06(DC brake current) in vector control mode and by 8.dcbr (DC brake current) in V/f control
mode.
After passing of time set by b-05 (DC brake time) from turning to OFF of this signal, Inverter stops. In case ofsimultaneous input of operation/jog command,and DC brake command, operation/jog command takes priority.
If this signal is turned to ON, it becomes initial excitation operation which flows current of excitation component
Initial excitation
to motor. This signal is used in case that response at starting time is required to be hastened, exciting in adcommand(vector control only) vance.In an initial excitation operation, AC initial excitation and DC initial excitation modes are available and any
mode can be selected by b-20 (initial excitation mode selection). In case of simultaneous input of operation/jog/DC brake command and b-20, each of operation/jog/DC brake command takes priority.
External failure
signal(protection relay
active)By inputting of failure signal of peripheral devices, Inverter can be stopped for protection. When signal of external failure signals 1〜4 is turned to ON, Inverter breaks output and turns protection relay to ON. At the sametime,[EF1]〜[EF4] are displayed on console. Also, trace back is triggered by this signal. For releasing of trouble, reset protection relay.

External failure
Same as above but protection relay is inactive and trace back is not triggered by this signal. In this case, trouble
signal is released automatically if all of each command of operation/jog/DC brake/initial excitation of Inverter are turned(protection relay
inactive) to OFF.
Trace back external Ordinary, trace back triggers at the times of failure and protective operation.However, it can be triggerd forcedly
by input of this signal
trigger
2nd motor selection If this signal is turned to ON, keeping L-00 (2nd motor use selection) at ON, each parameter of 2nd motor of
Setting Item L is used instead of parameter of of motor set at Setting Item A.
As to details of 2nd motor at the time of use, see item of Setting Item L.
Emergency stop
(B contact)

This is emergency stop signal of B contact input. It turns to emergency stop by contact-open. (Therefore, if thisfunction is set at any terminal block, Inverter cannot be operated owing to emergency stop unless contact isclosed)Programed oper- If this signal is turned to ON during programed operation, operation is proceeded to next step forcedly althoughprogramed time has not passed yet. As to programed operation, see item of Setting Item H.
ation advance
Selection of speed If this signal is turned to ON, speed command input position is designated to terminal block(VFC64TB[0-±10] orcommand terminal [4-20] terminal) forcedly, regardless of setting of b-15, b-16 (speed command position selection).
At the time of simultaneous input with preset speed command selection, this signal takes priority.
blockNote) Items shown as (vector control only) in above Table are not actuated in V/f control mode

58

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(2) Multifunction output (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

c-07

Terminal block MO1 (multifunction
output 1) function selection

c-08

Terminal block MO2 (multifunction
output 2) function selection

c-09

Terminal block MO3 (multifunction
output 3) function selection

c-10

Terminal block MO4 (multifunction
output 4) function selection

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

0: Programed operation end
1: Speed detection (1) (speed = detection setting)
2: Speed detection (1)(speed >=detection setting)
3: Speed detection (1)(speed <=detection setting)
4: Speed detection (2)(speed = detection setting)
5: Speed detection (2)(speed >=detection setting)
6: Speed detection (2)(speed <=detection setting)
7: Setting-reach
8: Torque detection
9: Absolute value torque detection
10: During power failure
11: Overload pre-alarm
12: During retry
13: During reverse run
14: Protective operation code
15: Sum check error

Unit

7
1
0
8

Terminal blocks MO1〜 MO4 on VFC64TB-P.C.Board are set as output terminal blocks of each function of multifunction output
to be set by c-07〜c-10, respectively (each terminal block of MO1〜MO4 is open collector output).
Note) However, in case that sequence function use selection (b-14) is set at ON, above setting is disregarded and terminal
blocks MO1〜 MO4 on VFC64TB-P.C.Board become output terminal from sequence function. Also, output of each function offollowing multifunction output can be used as input to sequence function.

Multifunction output item (in V/f control, [speed] in the above Table is to be converted to [frequency])
Item
Programed operation
end signal

Explanation of function
When final stage at the time of programed operation ends, this signal outputs.
(One-Time mode)
After end, outputs until disconnection of operation command.
Start command
Programed operation ends

Motor speed

Programed operation (One-Time mode)(End-Less mode)
Outputs 500ms when one round ends.
Start command
Programed operation ends

Motor speed

Programed operation (End-Less mode)

59

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Item
Speed detection(1)(2)(Speed =detection
setting)

Account function+C-13.
Turn output to ON when motor speed coincides with c-11, c-12 settings within width of Output has hysteresis width of 0.2% of max. speed.
Speed detection (1) output
Speed detection (2) output
c-11 detection speed (1)c-13 speed detection
range

Hysteresis width 0.2%/Top
c-12 detection speed (2)Motor speed
Speed detection(1)(2)(Speed＞=detection
setting)

Turn output to ON when motor speed becomes higher than c-11, c-12 settings.
(Speed is detected not by absolute value but by "with code".)Speed detection (1) output
Speed detection (2) output
c-11 detection speed (1)Hysteresis width 0.1%/Top
c-12 detection speed (2)Motor speed

Speed detection(1)(2)(Speed＜=detection
setting)

Turn output to ON when motor speed becomes lower than c-11, c-12 settings.
(Speed is detected not by absolute value but by "with code".)Speed detection (1) output
Speed detection (3) output
c-11 detection speed (1)Hysteresis width 0.1%/Top
c-12 detection speed
Motor speed

Setting-reachTurn output to ON when motor speed reaches +0.1% of speed command value.
Start command
Setting-reach output
Speed command

0.4%/Top
0.1%/Top

Speed setting

Motor speed
Torque detection(vector control)
Turn output to ON when torque command
becomes larger than setting of c-14.

Torque detection output(V/f control)
Turn output to ON when operation torquebecomes larger than setting of c-14.(Note)c-14 detection
torque setting
Output torque60

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Item
Absolute value torquedetection

Explanation of function(vector control)
Torque detection output
Turn output to ON when absolute valueof torque command becomes larger thanc-15 detection
setting of c-15.
torque setting(V/f control)
Output torqueTurn output to ON when absolute valueof operation torque becomes larger thansetting of c-15.(Note)c-15 detection torque setting x (-1)
During power
failureOutput during power
Turn output to ON when DC part voltage
failurebecomes smaller than 180V (360V in caseof 400V class) and to OFF when it beDC part voltage
comes larger than 200V (400V in case of
400V class). (However, turn output to OFF
when power of control P.C.Board is lost) 200V (at the time of 200V class)
180V (at the time of 200V class)Overload pre-alarm

Turn output to ON when overload counter,
which starts counting in the beginning of overload and actuates overload or overtorque protective operation (vector control only) at 100%
load, exceeds the level set by c-16 (overload
pre-alarm operation level).
(For example, when c-16 is set at 50% in casethat overcurrent protection actuates by 150%
current 60 sec. and in case that output current is150% as per Fig. right, output turns to ON at 30
sec., which is 50% of 60 sec., by which overload protection actuates)

86A(protection) relay
OL operating time x c-16/100

OL operating time

Overload pre-alarm output
Rated current value
Output current(effective value)

During retry

Turn output to ON for 10 sec. after retry from trouble. As to "retry from trouble", see item of Setting Item F.

During rev. run

Turn to ON during reverse run of motor. (There is a hysteresis of 12r/min (sensorless vector
control) or 1r/min (vector control with sensor) near 0 speed for prevention of chattering.

Note) In V/f control, accuracy of operation torque is not guaranteed. In case that accuracy of torque is needed, use vector control.

Item

Explanation of function

Protective operation
code

When trouble occurred and protection actuates, code of actuated protection is outputted using 4 multifunction output terminals.
(For this function, it is necessary to set [protective operation code] to all terminals (MO1〜MO4) of 4 multifunction outputs, different from other functions)
Table of output code
MO1
MO2
MO3
MO4
MO1
MO2
MO3
MO4
Content
Content

ON
Overcurrent
IGBT abnormal OFF
OFF
OFF
IGBTW abnormal OFF
ON
Overcurrent
OFF
Overload
DC fuse blown ON
OFF
Start stall
Overspeed, freq ON
IGBTU abnormal
IGBTV abnormal

Power failure
OvertorqueOverheat
Option abnormal

61

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON

Communication error ON

ON
Motor overheat OFF
Slave abnormal OFF
FCL abnormal OFF
Setting error 0 ON
Setting error 1 ON
Setting error 2 ON
Setting error 3 ON
External failure 1 OFF
External failure 2 ON
External failure 3 OFF
External failure 4 ON
Storage memory error OFF
Speed control error

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(3) Each setting data of multifunction input/output (common)(vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

c-11
c-12
c-13
c-14

Detection speed (1)-max. speed〜+max. speed

Detection speed (2)-max. speed〜+max. speed

Speed detection range

0〜600

Detection torque (with polarity)-205〜205

c-15
c-16
c-17

Detection torque (absolute value)

0〜205

Overload pre-alarm operation level

0〜100

Speed command reduction rate

50.0〜100.0

Setting Initializing
resolution data

1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1

0
0
0
0
0
50
90.0

Unit

r min
r min
r min
%
%
%
%

(V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

c-11
c-12
c-13
c-14
c-15

Detection speed (1)-max. freguency〜+max. freguency

Detection speed (2)-max. freguency〜+max. freguency

Speed detection range

0.0〜10.0

Detection torque (with polarity)-205〜205

Detection torque (absolute value)

0〜205

c-16
c-17

Overload pre-alarm operation level

0〜100

Speed command reduction rate

50.0〜100.0

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
0.1

0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
50
90.0

Unit

Hz
Hz
Hz
%
%
%
%

The above are setting data to be used in each multifunction input/output. As to details of function, see items of multifunction
input, multifunction output.

4-5. Setting Item d Accel/decel setting, Speed/frequency jump function, MRH function selection(1) Selection, setting of accel/decel times (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

d-00

Ordinary operation accel/decel selectiond-01

Jog operation accel/decel selection

d-02
d-03
d-04
d-05

Accel. time 3d-06

S pattern selection

d-07
d-08
d-09
d-10
d-11
d-12
d-13
d-14

S pattern rise time-1

Decel. time 3
Accel. time 4
Decel. time 4

S pattern accel. reach time-1
S pattern fall time-1
S pattern decel. reach time-1
S pattern rise time-2
S pattern accel. reach time-2
S pattern fall time-2
S pattern decel. reach time-2

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0: accel/decel time 1
1: accel/decel time 2
2: accel/decel time 3
3: accel/decel time 4

0.0 〜 3600.0
0.0 〜 3600.0
0.0 〜 3600.0
0.0 〜 3600.0
0 OFF
1 ON
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0
0.0〜60.0

Unit

0
1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1

30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0

sec
sec
sec
sec

OFF
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150

0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1

sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec

By d-00 and d-01, select accel/decel time settings which are used in ordinary operation and jog operation, respectively. Accel/decel time settings of ordinary operation can be changedby multifunction input also. This setting becomes ineffective at

the time of programed operation. See items of Setting Item c (multifunction input) and Setting Item H (programed operation).

62

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Each time of accel/decel to be selected
Selection by d-00,
d-01 setting or bymultifunction input

Accel time

Decel time

S patternrise time

S pattern accel.
reach time

S patternfall time

S pattern decel.
reach time

0: Accel/decel time 1

3.Acc1

4.dEc1

d-07

d-08

d-09

d-10

1: Accel/decel time 2

5.Acc2

6.dEc2

d-11

d-12

d-13

d-14

2: Accel/decel time 3

d-02

d-03

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

3: Accel/decel time 4

d-04

d-05

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

3.Acc1, 4.dEc1, 5.Acc2, 6.dEc2 are basic setting items.
When accel/decel times 3, 4 were selected, all of S pattern accel/decel times become 0.0.
As shown in accel/decel time chart (S pattern accel/decel) of Fig. below, each accel/decel time setting is accel/decel time andS pattern curving time between 0 ⇔ max. speed setting.
When S pattern accel/decel function is used, d-06 (S pattern accel/decel use selection) is necessary to be turned to ON. If OFF is kept,
S pattern accel/decel is not realized inspite of each time setting of S pattern accel/decel is set, for which please pay attention.
S patternfall time

S pattern accel
reach timeMax. speed setting

S patternrise time

S pattern decel
reach time

Decel time

Accel time

Time chart of accel/decel (S pattern accel/decel)(2) Speed deviation limit function at accel/decel times (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

+direction deviation max. value

0 OFF
1 ON
0.0〜100.0

0.1

5.0

%

-direction deviation max. value-100.0〜0.0

0.1

-5.0

%

d-15

Selection of speed deviation limit
command

d-16
d-17

OFF

Turning d-15 to ON, difference between actual motor speed and output of accel/decel control is limited to deviation set by d16 (plus side) and d-17 (minus side). By this function, prevents the case that load becomes light suddenly in the state of low
speed caused by coming up to torque limit during speed control operation as well as sudden acceleration caused by suddenchange of power source voltage, and can reset the speed by inclination to be set by accel/decel time. (If deviation is madetoo small, accel/decel is limited, for which please pay attention.

63

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(3) Speed/frequency command jump function (common)(vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

d-18

Jump (1) speed

0〜max. speed

1

0

r min

d-19

Jump (2) speed

0〜max. speed

1

0

r min

d-20

Jump (3) speed

0〜max. speed

1

0

r min

d-21

Jump (4) speed

0〜max. speed

1

0

r min

d-22

Jump speed range

0〜300

1

0

r min

(V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

d-18

Jump (1) frequency

d-19

Setting
Initiali-zing
resolution data

Unit

0〜max. frequency

0.1

0.0

Hz

Jump (2) frequency

0〜max. frequency

0.1

0.0

Hz

d-20

Jump (3) frequency

0〜max. frequency

0.1

0.0

Hz

d-21

Jump (4) frequency

0〜max. frequency

0.1

0.0

Hz

d-22

Jump frequency range

0〜10.0

0.1

0.0

Hz

(common) This is function to make speed/frequency command jump in order to avoid resonance point speed of load machine.
At the jump point, make speed/frequency command jump like hysteresis shape as per Fig. below (in case that the field ofspeed/frequency command jump function and jump field are overlapped). As the object to be jumped is speed/frequency
command to input to accel/decel control, it passes in jump width by inclination by accel/decel time setting during acceleration/deceleration.

speed/frequency command

Setting voltage (terminal block)([0〜±10]-[GND])
Speed/frequency command jump function

speed/frequency command

Setting voltage (terminal block)([0〜±10]-[GND])
When jump fields are overlapped

64Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(4) MRH (accel/decel by contact) mode (common)(vector control)
Setting range(selection item)

Content

Displayd-23

MRH operation selectiond-24

MRH upper limit speed

d-25

MRH lower limit speed

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

0
1

OFF
ON
MRH lower limit speed (d-25)〜max. speed-max. speed〜MRH upper limit speed (d-24)

Unit

OFF

1

300

r min

1

0

r min

(V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Contentd-23

MRH operation selectiond-24

MRH upper limit frequency

d-25

MRH lower limit frequency

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

0
1

OFF
ON
MRH lower limit frequency (d-25)〜max. frequency-max. frequency〜MRH upper limit frequency (d-24)

Unit

OFF
0.1

5.0

Hz

0.1

0.0

Hz

(common) If d-23 is turned to ON, accel/decel control by contact can be done (MRH mode). At this time, if speed/frequency
command setting selection position is selected to Terminal Block by setting of b-15 and b-16 and is selected to Console Sideby console
keys, it is possible to make UP, DOWN of speed/frequency.
Speed/frequency is accelerated/decelerated to d-24 (MRH upper limit speed/frequency) by UP command input and to d-25
(MRH lower limit speed/frequency) by DOWN command input.
In case of no input command of both UP, DOWN and of input command of both UP, DOWN, speed at that time is maintained. However, if speed is not in the range between settings of d-24 and d-25, speed accelerates/decelerates up to d-24 or
d-25 automatically.
By inputting of minus value to d-25 (MRH lower limit speed/frequency), for/rev operation by contact is possible.

Speed UP

Speed UP

Speed DOWN

Speed DOWN

d24-MRH upper

d24-MRH upper

limit speed

limit speed

d25-MRH lower
limit speed

Motor speed

Motor speed
When setting of MRH lower limit speed/frequency is plus

(min. speed)
d25-MRH lower
limit speed
When setting of MRH lower limit speed/frequency is minus

Note) When signals of multifunction input preset speed/ frequency command selection, speed/frequency command terminal
block selection are inputted during selection of MRH mode, speed command of each multifunction input preset speed/ frequency command, speed/frequency command terminal block takes priority.

65Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

4-6. Setting Item E Relatives of torque limit value, torque command characteristics, speed control, vector control(1) Torque limit value (common)(vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

E-00

For. run powering torque limit value

0〜200 (Note)

1

150

%

E-01

For. run regeneration torque limit value-200〜0 (Note)

1

-150

%

E-02

Rev. run powering torque limit value-200〜0 (Note)

1

-150

%

E-03

Rev. run regeneration torque limit value

0〜200(Note)

1

150

%

Torque limit can be set at powering and regeneration sides for both forward run and reverse run. When torque command exceeds these settings, torque is limited to these setting values.
Note) Max.(min.) value of setting range varies until max.(min.) 200(-200), depends on the rated current of motor to be used. Incase of use of motor, of which capacity coincides with Inverter capacity, setting range should be until 150%(-150%) ordinary.
(V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

E-00

Powering side torque limit value

E-01

Regeneration side torque limit value

E-02

Powering side torque limit value use selection

E-03

Regeneration side torque limit value use selection

0〜200 (Note)-200〜0 (Note)
0 : OFF
1 : ON
0 : OFF
1 : ON

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1

150

%

1

-150

%

ON
ON

If both E-02 and E-03 are turned to ON, it is possible to limit the torque for powering side and regeneration side, respectively.
<Powering side>
When E-02 is at ON, if operation torque exceeds setting of E-00 to the powering side, acceleration of frequency is limited andfrequency is lowered. In case that lowering of frequency is required to inhibit, turn E-02 to OFF.
<Regeneration side>
When E-03 is at ON, if operation torque exceeds setting of E-01 to the regeneration side, deceleration of frequency is limited.
Note) Since control of torque is not executed directly in V/f control, torque cannot be limited accurately. In case of need of accurate limit of torque, use vector control mode.

(2) Torque command fine adjustment gain (vector control)
Display

E-04

Content
UnusedSetting range(selection item)

Setting
Initializing
resolution data

Unit

Setting range(selection item)

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

Unit

-

(3) Torque command mode selection (vector control)
Display

E-05

Content
Torque command mode selection

0: % command
1: absolute value command0

Select characteristics of torque command in the area of fixed output (weak excitation).

66

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

In case of % command selection
Fixed torque area
Output torque

In case of absolute value command selection
Fixed output area

Fixed torque area

Fixed output area
Output torque

Torque limit

Torque limit

100% torque command

100% torque command

50% torque command

50% torque commandA05 (Motor rated speed)

A05 (Motor rated speed)

Speed

Even if torque command is constant, output torque falls inaccordance with weakening rate of flux in fixed torque area.

Speed

Even in fixed output area, output torque is constant if
command is constant. (Limiter lowers)(4) V/f pattern selection (V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

0: straight line
1: square reduction
2: bend line
0〜230 (200V class)
Bend point voltage of bend line at the time of V/f0〜460 (400V class)

E-04

0

V/f pattern selection

E-05
E-06

Bend point frequency of bend line at the time of V/f

Unit

0.0〜max. frequency (A-00)

1

0

V

0.1

0.0

Hz

Conforming to the characteristics of load, select the pattern of V/f.
V/f pattern straight line

V/f pattern square reduction

V/f pattern bend line

Use when load has constant torquecharacteristics

Effective when load has square reduction
torque characteristics(Fan, Pump, etc.)

Effective when load has 2 steps torquecharacteristics

A-03 (motor
rated voltage)

A-03 (motor
rated voltage)

A-03 (motor
rated voltage)
E-05 (bendpoint voltage)(boost level)

A-07(motor
rated frequency)

A-07(motor
rated frequency)(boost level)(boost level)

E-06 (bendpoint freq.)A-07(motor
rated frequency)(5) Speed control (ASR) selection (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content01
01

Initializing
Setting
resolution data

Unit

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ASR feedforward selection
E-07
ON
ON
In VF64 Inverter, robust speed control (MFC control) is structured combining cancelation using disturbance observer andfeedforward. These cancelation and feedforward can be turned to OFF individually. (If both of them are turned to OFF, thatwill be equal to conventional PI control)(See item of Basic Setting Item, Speed control gain)
E-06

67

ASR cancelation selection

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(6) Adjustment of variable proportional gain (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

E-08

Variable proportion variation start speed

E-09

Variable proportional min. gain ratio

Setting Initializing
resolution data

0.01

0.01〜100.00
0〜100(VF64S mode)
0〜100(VF64V mode)

1

Unit

5.00

%

20

%

100

Proportiongain
Proportion-gain
setting value

Adjust variable proportional gain, which varies proportional
gain depending on the largeness of deviation between
speed command and motor speed.

Speed deviation(absolute value)
Variable proportional gain
(7) Flux command adjustment (vector control)
Display

E-10
E-11

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

Flux command

20.0〜150.0

0.1

100.0

%

Strengthening rate of flux at starting time

100.0〜150.0

0.1

100.0

%

E-10(Flux command) : Command value on the largeness of flux to be used in vector control. Set it at 100.0% ordinary.
E-11(Strengthening rate of flux at starting time) : This is used in case of strengthening the flux at starting time only forincreasing the starting torque. As there may be a case of instability depending on motor, set it at 100.0%(no strengthening) ordinary.
(8) Current control gain adjustment (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

E-12

Current control proportional gain

0.0〜9.9

0.1

3.0

E-13

Current control integration time constant

0.0〜9.9

0.1

1.5

E-14

Current control feedforward component gain 0〜200

1

70

Unit

ms

The above is gain of current control. Keep initial value ordinary.(In V/f control, this gain is used at auto-tuning and at the timeof free start only)(9) Use selection of temperature detection option (vector control)
Display

E-15

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of temperature detection option

0
1

OFF
ON

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

OFF

ON is selected when compensation of temperature variation is performed by motor temperature, which is detected by temperature sensor embedded in motor. Temperature detection option (T/V61V) is needed separately.
In VF64 Inverter, motor temperature compensation operation is included in the Inverter control operation however, as thetemperature before running cannot be operated, temperature detection option is used for compensation of torque at startingtime in case that starting torque is required at the places where motor temperature falls while motor is stopped.

68

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

4-7. Setting Item F Built-in DB operation setting, protective function, trace back setting(1) Built-in DB operation level (common)
Display

F-00

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Built-in DB operation level

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

320〜360(200V class)

1

340

V

640〜720(400V class)

2

680

V

Set operation level of built-in DB transistor. When DC voltage rises higher than this setting, DB transistor is turned to ON
and when lower than this setting DB transistor is turned to OFF. Ordinary, keep the level at initial value but in case that DB
transistor is turned to ON owing to high power source voltage even not in brake mode, make setting at higher level. Also, thissetting interlocks operation level of regeneration stall preventive function. (See item of b-13)Note) In VF64-1R122〜1122 (200V class), VF64-1R144〜1544 (400V class), transistor for dynamic brake (DB) is incorporated and it can make dynamic braking by connection with DB resistor and thermal relay between main circuit terminal blocks[+2]-[B].
(2) Overspeed protection setting (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

F-01

For. run side overspeed setting

0〜max. speed(A-00)x1.5

1

1900

r min

F-02

Rev. run side overspeed setting-max. speed(A-00)x1.5〜0

1

-1900

r min

When motor speed exceeds this setting value, overspeed protective function actuates and Inverter trips. Set forward and reverse sides individually. (In case of change of max. speed (A-00), set F-01 and F-02 at less than 1.5 times of max. speed inadvance)(3) Overfrequency protection setting (V/f control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

F-01

For. run side overfrequency

0〜max. frequency(A-00)x1.5

0.1

65.0

Hz

F-02

Rev. run side overfrequency-max. frequency(A-00)x1.5〜0

0.1

-65.0

Hz

When output frequency exceeds this setting value, overfrequency protective function actuates and Inverter trips. Set forward
and reverse sides individually. (In case of change of max. frequency (A-00), set F-01 and F-02 at less than 1.5 times of max.
frequency in advance)(4) Overload protection setting (common)
Display

F-03

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Overload protection setting

20〜110Setting Initializing
resolution data

1

100

Unit
%

Set reference current value of overload protection by ratio to motor rated current (A-04). If effective value of Inverter output current exceeds 105% of the reference current, overload protection counter starts sensing it as overload status and overload protection (OL) operates at the point of 60 sec. at 150% as per the curve of relation of OL actuation time and output current effective value of the Fig. below.
OL protection
operating time(sec)
OL operating time
= 2700/(% to output current(reference current)-105)

Output current effective value(% to reference current)

OVERLOAD PROTECTION (OL) OPERATING TIME

69

Note) Overload protection counter can be monitored by console. (comparing with counterof overtorque protection, larger one is displayed) Overload counter counts in thestatus of overload with the lapse of timeand at 100%, overload protection operates
and Inverter trips.
OL pre-alarm function, which outputs signal when overload counter exceeds discretionary point, can be used also. (Seemultifunction output of Setting Item c)

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(5) FCL (high speed current limit) level setting (common)
Display
F-04

Setting range(selection item)

Content
FCL level adjustment

80〜125

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
1

100

Unit
%

Set the limit value of FCL (high speed current limit). Set it at 100% ordinary.
When instantaneous current of 2.86 times of the rated current of Inverter main body flows to any of phases at 100% setting,
FCL function turns output of each phase of Inverter to OFF once in order to protect the Inverter (if current value falls, it turns
Inverter output to ON automatically). When ON/OFF of output by this FCL function continues for more than 10 sec.
successively (min. 2 sec. in case of output frequency of less than 10Hz), FCL continual protection operates and Inverter
trips.
(6) Overtorque protection (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content
0: OFF
1: ON
110〜205

F-05

Selection of overtorque protective operation

F-06

Overtorque protection setting

F-07

Reference torque of overtorque protective operation 50〜105

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

ON

-

1

150

%

1

105

%

Set overtorque protection. By F-05, active/inactive of protective operation can be selected.
In case that F-05 is set at ON, if torque command exceeds reference torque set by F-07,overtorque protection counter starts,
sensing it as status of overtorque and overtorque protection (OT) operates at the point of 60 sec. in case of F-06 setting of
torque command as per curve of relation of OT protection operating time and torque command of the Figure below. Torquecommand to be used for this protection can make compensation to deduct machine loss component from actual torquecommand. (See machine loss compensation of Setting Item i)
Overtorque protection (OT) operating time
OT protection
operating timeNote) Similarly to overload protection, overtorque counter can be monitored by console.
OT operating time(compared with overload protection counter,= 60x([F-06]-[F-07])/(torque command - [F-07])
larger one is displayed)
Overtorque counter counts with the lapse oftime in the status of overtorque and at 100%,
overtorque protection operates and Inverter
trips.
OT pre-alarm function, which outputs signal
when overtorque counter exceeds discretionary point, can also be used.
(See multifunction output of Setting Item c)
Torque command

OVERTORQUE PROTECTION (OT) OPERATING TIME

(7) Speed control error protection setting (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

F-09

0: OFF
1: ON+side detection width of speed control error 50〜500

F-10-side detection width of speed control error

F-08

Use selection of speed control error-500〜-50

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

OFF

-

1

100

r/min

1

-100

r/min

By F-08, active/inactive of speed control error protection can be selected.
When speed control error operation is selected and if motor speed (operation speed in sensorless vector control) exceeds therange of「SPD＿REF+[F-10]〜SPD＿REF+[F-09]」([F-10] is minus value) against speed command (SPD＿REF), Inverter
trips by speed control error.
Detective function actuates at the times of speed control part abnormal, PG abnormal (vector control with sensor only) andspeed down caused by that load torque exceeds torque limit.

70

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Motor
speed
Speed control error operation

F-09

Speed command

Reference speed command is speed command selected by b-01=0 (speed control).
In case of others, it is speed command of input from [0-±10] terminal block (or [4-20]) of
VFC64TB terminal block.

F-10

Speed control error operation

OPERATION RANGE OF SPEED CONTROL ERRORPROTECTIVE FUNCTION(8) Motor overheat protection (common)
Display
F-12

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of motor overheat protective
operation

0: OFF
1: ON

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
-

OFF

Unit
-

Select active/inactive of motor overheat protection. In case that this function is set at ON and motor temperature exceeds
150 C, Inverter trips.
Note) This function needs motor incorporating temperature sensor and motor temperature detection option (T/V61V). If
T/V61V is not connected, keep this function at OFF.

(9) Operation of protection relay at the time of power failure (common)
Display
F-13

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of operation of protection
relay at the time of power failure

0: OFF
1: ON

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
-

OFF

Unit
-

Select operation of protection relay (86A) at the time when Inverter detects power failure.
OFF: Even if Inverter detected power failure, protection relay does not operate and when running (or jogging, initial excitation,
DC brake) command is turned to OFF after re-supply of power, "uV" (undervoltage) of protection display is reset automatically.
When [b-11] (re-start selection after instantaneous power failure) is at ON, Inverter is reset after re-supply of power automatically and re-starts.
ON: Detecting power failure, protection relay operates and Inverter trips. Even if [b-11] (re-start selection after instantaneous
power failure) is turned to ON, Inverter does not re-start automatically. In this case and similarly to other protective operations,protection relay (86A) and "uV" (undervoltage) of protection display are reset by protection reset operation by reset terminal or
reset key.
(10) Retry-after-trouble function (common)
Display
F-14

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Number of times of retry-after-trouble

0〜5

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
1

0

Unit
-

When trouble and protective operation occurred, [automatic protection reset] → [automatic re-start] is repeated until the number of times set at F-14. Automatic reset is done after 1 sec. from occurrence of protective operation and after that, automatic re-operation is done. If protective operation occurred again within 10 sec. after re-start, arrange counter of retry to add 1
and if counter value is less than setting value of F-14, reset again and re-start Inverter. If protective operation does not occur
for 10 sec. after re-start by automatic re-operation, clear the figure of counter of retry as retry was done satisfactorily.
Note) Objective protection of retry are limited to the kinds of overvoltage, fuse blown, overspeed, overfrequency, power failure (at ON time of 86A), option error, external failure.

71

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(11) Trace back function setting (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

F-15

Trace back pitch

1〜100

1

1

ms

F-16

Trace back trigger point

1〜99

1

80

-

F-17

Trace back CH1selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-18

Trace back CH2 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-19

Trace back CH3 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-20

Trace back CH4 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-21

Trace back CH5 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-22

Trace back CH6 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-23

Trace back CH7 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-24

Trace back CH8 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-25

Trace back CH9 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-26

Trace back CH10 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-27

Trace back CH11 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-28

Trace back CH12 selection

0〜64

1

0

-

F-15: Set the interval of trace back.
F-16: Set trigger point of trace back.
F-17〜F-28: Select whether each CH of trace back is
to be internal data of Inverter or to be "variable" ofsuperblock function.

Trace backdataNote) Setting of trace back pitch and trace backpoint is necessary to be executed before collection ofdata of trace back by protective operation, etc.

Trigger point

Setting of trace back point(vector control): Table of setting of F17〜28
F-17〜28 setting

In case of 0
Record data

In case of 1〜64
Dimension

CH1

U phase current

CH2

V phase current

CH3

W phase current

CH4

DC voltage

CH5

Output voltage

CH6

Motor speed

CH7

Speed command (after accel/decel control)

CH8Torque command

5000/100%

CH9

Output frequency

CH10Slide frequency

20000/frequency
correspond to max. speed

CH11

Flux

1024/rated flux

CH12

Motor temperature

10/1°
C

(3536/Inverter rating)

10/1V (200V class)
5/1V (400V class)

Record data

Dimension

Output RAM(1〜64) of
superblock(setting of
F-17〜28 isselection of
output RAM
as it is)20000/100%

20000/max. speed

72Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items(V/f control): Table of setting of F17〜28
F-17〜28 setting

In case of 0

In case of 1〜64

Record data

Dimension

Record data

CH1

U phase current(3536/Inverter rating)

CH2

V phase current

CH3

W phase current

Output RAM(1〜64) of
superblock(setting of

CH4

DC voltage

10/1V (200V class)

CH5

Output voltage

5/1V (400V class)

CH6

Unused

F-17〜28 isselection of
output RAM
as it is)CH7

Speed command (after accel/decel control)

20000/max. frequency

CH8Torque command

5000/100%

CH9

Output frequency

20000/max. frequency

CH10

UnusedCH11

UnusedCH12Motor temperature

Display

Content

G-00

Analog input +side adjustment gain

50.00〜150.00

0.01

100.00%G-01

Analog input -side adjustment gain

50.00〜150.00

0.01

100.00%Dimension
20000 100

10/1℃

Setting range(selection item)

This is adjustment gain to adjust finely the analog input of VFC64TB P.C.Board [0-+-10],Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

[4-20] terminal. When plus voltage

is inputted, G-00 is effective and when minus voltage is inputted, gain of G-01 is effective. This is adjusted before delivery
ordinary however,re-adjustment is needed in case that initializing (default) of P.C.Board is executed.(This item is effective inboth cases that input is used as speed/frequency command and as torque command)
Adjustment method of gain
1) Select monitor [G-AdJ] of console.
+10] - [GND].
2) Input +10V to between [0-3) Adjust G-00 to make monitor display 10.000.
4) Input -10V to between [0-+-10] - [GND].
5) Adjust G-01 to make monitor display 10.000. (even if minus voltage is inputted, monitor displays absolute value)
Note 1) Adjust monitor to display 5.000 by 20mA input at the adjustment by 4〜20mA input and to display 10.000 by
150kHz at the adjustment by pulse train input.
Note 2) Adjustment of 4), 5) is unnecessary in case that setting of minus side is not used.
+10],[4-20] terminal input) characteristic setting (common)(2) Analog speed/frequency command (VFC64TB P.C.Board [0-Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

G-02

Analog speed/frequency command
characteristic selection+10V (bipolarity)
0: 0〜1: 0〜10V (unipolarity)
2: 4〜20mA
3: Pulse train(0〜150kHz)

G-03

Analog speed command upper limit
speed/frequency

Absolute value of (G-04)〜100.0

G-04

Analog speed command lower limit
speed/frequency-(G-03)〜(G-03)

73

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1

0.1

100.0

%

0.1

0.0

%

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items+10],[4-20] terminal block ofNote) G-03, G-04 are set by % to max. speed/frequency (A-00). Set G-03, G-04 in case that [0-VFC64TB P.C.Board is used as speed/frequency command.

(As to setting of speed/frequency command position

selection, see items of b-15, b-16. In case of use as the torque command input, characteristic is to be+10V(-10V:150%,+10V:-150%), regardless of this setting.)
0〜At G-02, set any one of voltage input (bipolarity/unipolarity), current input, pulse train input is to be speed/frequency
command input. Not G-02 only, it is necessary to changeover SW1, SW2 on VFC64TB. Table below shows"G-02 setting", "SW1, SW2 settings"and "terminal block to input setting signal" for respective setting input.
Voltage input
+10V)
(0--

Setting input
to be used

Current input(4〜20mA)

Voltage input(0-+10V)

Pulse train input(0-150kHz)

G-02 setting

0

1

2

3

SW1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

SW2

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

+10] terminal block[0--[4-20] terminal block+10] terminal block[0--+10] terminal block
Input terminal block [0--Characteristic of speed/frequency command to the selected setting input is explained as follows.
+10V)(G-02=0)
1) Voltage input (0〜By making the command input voltage to minus voltage, motor can be run reversely (in case of drive by reverse runcommand, rotation is changed to reverse run by plus voltage and forward run by minus voltage). Characteristic is of G-03
setting at the time of +10V input and, minus value of G-03 setting at the time of -10V input however, minus side thanG-04 setting is limited (therefore, G-04 is necessary to be set at -100% in case of use until max. of minus). Meanwhile,when A-01 (min. speed/frequency) is other than 0, absolute value is limited not to be less than this speed/frequency.
In this case, when characteristic line passes near 0V, it has hysteresis characteristic as per Figures below (At starting time,
it is min. speed/frequency of forward run in case of forward run start and that of reverse run in case of reverse run start).

Speed/frequency

Speed/frequency

commandcommand

Input voltage
Input voltage

1-1) At the time of voltage input+10V) selection(0〜-1-2) Hysteresis characteristic of minimum
speed/frequency(A-01) near 0V

74

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

2) Voltage input (0〜+10V)(G-02=1)
Characteristic is of G-04 at the time of 0V input and G-03 at the time of 10V input however, plus voltage only is effective
and minus voltage is limited to G-04 (but 0 in case that minus value is set at G-04).
In case that A-01(min. speed/frequency) is other than 0, absolute value is limited not to be less than this speed/frequency.
As speed/frequency command is forward run only, reverse run command is used in case of turning to reverse run.
Speed/frequency command

Speed/frequency command

input voltage

input voltage2-1) At the time of 0〜+10V selection (at the time of G04＞=0)2-2) At the time of 0〜+10V selection (at the time of G04＜0)3) Current input (4〜20mA)(G-02=2)
Characteristic is of G-04 at the time of 4mA input and G-03 at the time of 20mA input however, plus side current only iseffective and minus current is limited to G-04 (but 0 in case that minus value is set at G-04) at the time of input. Meanwhile
when A-01 (min. speed/frequency) is other than 0, absolute value is limited not to be less than this speed/frequency. As
speed/frequency command is forward run only, reverse run command is used in case of turning to reverse run.
Speed/frequency command

Speed/frequency command

input

input

3-1) At the time of 4〜20mA selection (at the time of G04＞=0)

3-2) At the time of 4〜20mA selection (at the time of G04＜0)4) Pulse train input (G-02 =3)
In case of use by pulse train, turn SW1, SW2 on VFC64TB P.C.Board to ON and input pulse signal of duty 1:1 by 0-15V to
between [0-±10] - [GND] terminals.
As setting characteristic is same with that of voltage input (0〜+10V), read item of (0〜+10V) to 0-150kHz instead.
(3) Analog input 0 limit function (common)
Display
G-05

Content
Analog input 0 limit voltage

Setting range(selection item)
0.000〜1.000

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
0.001

0.000

Unit
V

0 limit voltage In case that absolute value of command input voltage inputted to VFC64TB[0-±10] is less than this setting,above function makes it to 0 forcedly.
This function is used when voltage does not become 0 perfectly caused by drift, etc. of analog circuit, in spite of setting at
0V. (It is effective in case of use of both speed/frequency command and torque command)75

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(4) Setting of relatives of analog output (VFC64TB-P.C.Board[A] terminal block)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

G-06

Analog output

selection

Analog output adjustment gain
Analog output adjustment offset

G-07
G-08

0: Output voltage
1: Output current
2: Torque command (vector control)
Operation torque (V/f control)
3: Motor speed (vector control)
Output frequency (V/f control)
4: Speed command (vector control)
Frequency command (V/f control)
5: Super block output
6: Calibration
7: (For our testing)
50.0〜150.0-50.0〜50.0

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

1

-

0.1
0.1

100.0
0.0

%
%

The above is setting of selection of data, offset adjustment, gain adjustment of analog output which are outputted from between terminal blocks [A]-[GND] of VFC64TB P.C.Board.
Analog output selected by G-06
(vector control)
Selection item

Output voltage

Selection item

Output voltage0

Output voltage

7.5V/200V (200V class)
7.5V/400V (400V class)4

10V/max. speed (A-00)
Speed command(after accel/decel control)1Output current effective value 5V/Inverter rated current

5Super block output

5V/20000(100%)

2Torque command

5V/100%6

Calibration

outputs 5V

3

Motor speed

10V/max. speed (A-00)

7(For our testing)-----(V/f control)
Selection item

Output voltage

Selection item

Output voltage0

Output voltage

7.5V/200V (200V class)
7.5V/400V (400V class)4

Frequency command 10V/max. frequency (A-00)(after accel/decel control)1Output current effective value 5V/Inverter rated current

5Super block output

5V/20000(100%)2

Operation torque

5V/100%6

Calibration

outputs 5V3

Output frequency

10V/max. frequency(A-00)

7(For our testing)-----(5) Speed(frequency) meter (VFC64TB P.C.Board [ f ] terminal block) output selection (common)
Display
G-09

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Speed(frequency) meter output selection 0: PG output (duty 1:1)
1: Output frequency (6F output)
2: Motor speed (6F output)
3: Calibration (6F output)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

-

2

Unit

-

Note) PG output can be selected by vector control mode with sensor only.
Signal, which is outputted to between [ f ]-[GND]terminal blocks on VFC64TB-P.C.Board, is selected.
0: PG output
Making frequency dividing of wave form of PG (B phase), outputs as signal of (0-10V). It is possible to select 1/2 frequency
dividing and 1/4 frequency dividing by SW3 on VFC64TB P.C.Board. (SW3: OFF:1/2 frequency dividing, ON: 1/4 frequency dividing)
1: Output frequency, 2: Motor speed, 3: Calibration
When these are selected, frequency signal (6F signal) of 6 times of frequency (or frequency conversion value) is outputtedfrom [ f ]-[GND] terminal blocks as shown in the Fig. of next page.

76

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

When motor speed is selected, frequency conversion value F is calculated as:F = (motor speed) / 60 x (number of motor pole) / 2(Since motor speed is not displayed in case of V/f control, F is always 0)
When calibration is selected, frequency conversion value corresponding to max. speed (A-00) in case of vector control
and max. frequency (A-00) in case of V/f control are outputted.
When frequency/speed meters of digital counter type are used, make 1/6 frequency dividing of pulse count.
DC average voltage to output frequency is as per Fig. [Frequency-Voltage characteristic] below. In case of use of DC
voltmeter, adjust it conforming to the characteristic of this Figure. (However, in case that frequency conversion value of max.
speed in vector control or max. frequency in V/f control exceeds 120Hz, the value will be 1/2 and when that exceeds 240Hz,
the value will be 1/4 of the said rate)
3.6V
10V

voltage

T1
T2
Frequency (conversion value) 60Hz

6F signal output wave form

Frequency-voltage characteristic(In case that frequency conversion value (vector control)and max. frequency (V/f control) of max.
speed are less than 120Hz)

T1, T2 of above Fig. are:T1 = 1ms= 0.5ms(Frequency conversion value (max. frequency in case of V/f control) of max. speed is less than 120Hz)(Frequency conversion value (max. frequency in case of V/f control) of max. speed is less than 240Hz)= 0.25ms (Frequency conversion value (max. frequency in case of V/f control) of max. speed exceeds 240Hz)
T2 = 1/(6xF) F: Output frequency or frequency conversion value(6) Isolated speed/frequency command analog input (ISO64, IO64 option) adjustment (common)
Display

Content

G-10
G-11

Isolated analog setting adjustment gain
Isolated analog input characterictic selection

G-12
G-13

Isolated analog setting upper limit speed/frequency
Isolated analog setting lower limit speed/frequency

Setting range(selection item)
50.00〜150.00
0: 0〜+10V
1: 4〜20mA
Absolute value of (G-13) 〜100.0-(G-12)〜(G-12)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

0.01

100.00

%

-

0

-

0.1
0.1

100.0
0.0

%
%

Note) G-12 , G-13 are set by % to max. speed/frequency (A-00).
Set the input between terminal blocks [1]-[3] of ISO64 Option P.C.Board or terminal blocks [1]-[2] of IO64 Option P.C.Board.
As characteristic of setting is same with analog input of VFC64TB P.C.Board, see items of G-00〜G-04. However, minus
voltage input and pulse train input cannot be used. Further, this setting is for input of speed/frequency command. When input
is used by 0〜+10V, turn SW1 on ISO64 P.C.Board, IO64 P.C.Board to OFF and when used by 4-20mA, turn SW1 to ON.
(Display of console monitor [G＿AdJ] at the time just after setting of G-10 is input voltage of terminal block [1] of this ISO64
Option P.C.Board or that of IO64 Option P.C.Board. As resolution of input operation is low compared with VFC64TB[0-±10]
terminal input, ripple of about ± 0.01 occurs by display of [G＿AdJ])(7) Isolated torque command analog input (ISO64 Option) adjustment (common)
Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Display

Content

G-14

Isolated torque command input adjustment gain

50.0〜150.0

0.1

100.0

%

G-15

Isolated torque command input offset adjustment q'ty

-50.0〜50.0

0.1

0.0

%

77

Unit

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

Adjust gain and offset between terminal blocks [4]-[3] of ISO64 Option
P.C.Board. As this input can get the data faster than other analog input by
12 bit A/D Converter, it is used isolating the torque command, whichneeds high speed response.
G-14: This is adjustment gain to the input and effective for both plus andminus sides.
G-15: This is offset adjustment. It adjusts to make torque command 0 at
the time of 0V input.
(Torque command is not available at the time of V/f control but it can beused as input of super block function)

Torque command
+150%

10V
Input voltage

-10V

-150%

Torque command input characteristic(8) Isolated analog output (IO64 Option) adjustment (option)
Display
G-16

G-17
G-18

Content
Isolated analog output selection

Isolated analog output adjustment gain
Isolated analog output offset adjustment q'ty

Setting range(selection item)
0 : Output voltage
1 : Output current
2 : Torque command (vector control)
Operation torque (V/f control)
3 : Motor speed (vector control)
Output frequency (V/f control)
4 : Speed command (vector control)
Frequency command (V/f control)
5 : Super block output
6 : Calibration
7 : (For our testing)
8 : Output voltage(4〜20mA)
9 : Output current(4〜20mA)
10 : Torque command (4〜20mA)(vector control)
Operation torque(4〜20mA)(V/f control)
11 : Motor speed(4〜20mA)(vector control)
Output frequency(V/f control)
12 : Speed command(4〜20mA)(vector control)
Frequency command (4〜20mA)(vector control)
13 : Super block output (4〜20mA)
14 : Calibration(4〜20mA)
50.0〜150.0-50.0〜50.0

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

1

-

0.1
0.1

100.0
0.0

%
%

The above is analog output, which outputs to between terminal blocks [3]-[4] of IO64, and adjustment of gain and offset. In
case of selection of analog signal to output, select as shown in the next Table.

78

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items±10V output
IO64-SW2 = ON

4-20mA output
IO64-SW2 = OFF

G-16 setting Output voltage rate

G-16 setting

Output voltage0

Output current

1

7.5V/200V(200V class)
7.5V/400V(400V class)
5V/Inverter rated current

2

5V/100%Torque command (vector control)
Operation torque (V/f control)
Motor speed (vector control)
Output frequency (V/f control)
Speed command (vector control)
Frequency command (V/f control)

3
4

10V/max. speed (A-00)
10V/max. frequency (A-00)
10V/max. speed (A-00)
10V/max. frequency (A-00)

Output current rate

916mA/200V(200V class)
16mA/400V(400V class)
12mA/Inverter rated current

10

12mA/100%

8

11
12

20mA/max. speed (A-00)
20mA/max. frequency (A-00)
20mA/max. speed (A-00)
20mA/max. frequency (A-00)

Super block output

5

5V/20000(100%)13

12mA/20000(100%)

Calibration

6

outputs 5V

14

outputs 12mA

Note) In case that 4-20mA is selected, absolute value of data is outputted since output is turned to unipolarity of plus side.
(9) Motor temperature detection option (T/V61V Option) adjustment (common)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

G-19

Temperature correction option offset adjustment quantity -20.0〜20.0

0.1

0.0

%

G-20

Temperature correction option gain adjustment quantity

0.1

100.0

%

50.0〜150.0

Adjust the offset and gain of motor temperature correction option (T/V61).

4-9. Setting Item H Setting of relatives of preset operation/ programed operation(1) Preset operation/ programed operation speed/frequency command (common)(vector control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

H-00

Preset speed command 1

1

0

r/min

H-01

Preset speed command 2

1

0

r/min

H-02

Preset speed command 3

1

0

r/min

H-03

Preset speed command 4

1

0

r/min

H-04

Preset speed command 5

1

0

r/min

H-05

Preset speed command 6

1

0

r/min

H-06

Preset speed command 7

1

0

r/min

H-07

Preset speed command 8

1

0

r/min

-max. speed 〜max. speed(V/f control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

H-00

Preset frequency command 1

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-01

Preset frequency command 2

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-02

Preset frequency command 3

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-03

Preset frequency command 4

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-04

Preset frequency command 5

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-05

Preset frequency command 6

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-06

Preset frequency command 7

0.1

0.0

Hz

H-07

Preset frequency command 8

0.1

0.0

Hz

79

-max. frequency〜max. frequency

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(common)Item H is setting of speed/frequency command of preset operation function or undermentioned programed operation function selected by multifunction input signal. As to selection by multifunction input signal of preset operation,see item of
Setting Item C, Multifunction input/output.
Note) Since selectable speed is up to 7 kinds, [(H-07) preset speed/frequency command 8] cannot be used but by programed operation only.
(2) Selection of programed operation mode (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

H-08

Selection of programed operation mode

0 : OFF
1 : One-Time
2 : End-less

0 : OFF
1 : One-Time
2 : End-lessSetting Initializing
resolution
data
-

0

Unit

-

Programed operation is not executed (ordinary operation).
Executing one time only of 1〜8 speeds of programed operation, Inverter stops automatically. (Ifoperation command is kept inputting for more than 10 secs., Start Stall trouble occurs and "StrF" isdisplayed.
Programed operation is repeated until operation command is turned to OFF.
(Until pressing the [STOP] key at the time of console operation)(3) Setting of programed operation time (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content
0: Sec.
1: Min.
2: Hour

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

0

-

Programed operation time 1

0.1

0.0

-

H-11

Programed operation time 2

0.1

0

-

H-12

Programed operation time 3

0.1

0

-

H-13

Programed operation time 4

0.1

0

-

H-14

Programed operation time 5

0.1

0

-

H-15

Programed operation time 6

0.1

0

-

H-16

Programed operation time 7

0.1

0

-

H-17

Programed operation time 8

0.1

0

-

H-09

Selection of programed operation time unit

H-10

H-09:

0.0〜3600.0

Set the time unit of setting of H-10〜17.

H-10〜17: Set the operation time of each step of programed operation. (Set 0.0 for the time of step of no use)
(4) Accel/decel time selection at the time of programed operation (common)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

H-18

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 1

H-19

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 2

H-20

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 3

H-21

0: Accel/decel time 1
1: Accel/decel time 2
2: Accel/decel time 3
3: Accel/decel time 4

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

-

0

-

-

0

-

-

0

-

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 4

-

0

-

H-22

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 5

-

0

-

H-23

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 6

-

0

-

H-24

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 7

-

0

-

H-25

Programed operation accel/decel time selection 8

-

0

-

At the time of programed operation, select accel/decel time setting of each step by H-18〜H-25, regardless of setting of d00, d-01 or multifunction input (accel/decel time selection).

80

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

Each time of accel/decel to be selected.
Selection of
H-18〜25

Accel time

Decel time

S patternrise time

S pattern accel
reach time

S patternfall time

S pattern decel
reach time

0: Accel/decel time 1

3.Acc1

4.dEc1

d-07

d-08

d-09

d-10

1: Accel/decel time 2

5.Acc2

6.dEc2

d-11

d-12

d-13

d-14

2: Accel/decel time 3

d-02

d-03

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

3: Accel/decel time 4

-04
d-04
d

d-05

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

3.Acc1, 4.dEc1, 5.Acc2, 6.dEc2 are basic setting items.
When accel/decel times 3, 4 are selected, all of S pattern accel/decel times are 0.0.
Start command

Speed/frequency

Accel/decel time
selection
Example of programed operation pattern

4-10. Setting Item i Droop control, machine loss compensation(1) Droop control setting (common)Content

Displayi-00

Droop control selection

i-01

Droop start speed/frequency

i-02

Droop ratio changeover speed/frequency

Setting range(selection item)

0 OFF
1 ON
0.0〜100.0
0.0〜100.0

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

OFF
0.1

0.0

%

0.1

0.0

%
%
%

i-03

Droop ratio

0.0〜50.0

0.1

0.0

i-04

Droop start torque

0.0〜90.0

0.1

0.0Note) i-01 and i-02 are set by % to max. speed/frequency (A-00).
Execute each setting of droop control, which is used in order to balance the torque of 2 motors,etc.
i-00: Select active/inactive of droop control.
i-01: Droop control starts at i-01 or over. (When speed/frequency become lower than this speed/frequency as a result ofdroop control, it is limited to this speed/frequency.
i-02: Making the speed/frequency set here as the boundary, execute "% droop control" to the input speed/frequency inthe higher area and "absolute value droop control"which is based on the speed/frequency set at i-02 in the lowerarea.
i-03: Set droop amount of the time when torque command becomes 100%. When torque command is higher than thevalue set by i-02, droop ratio is constant and when that is lower than the value set by i-02, droop amount is constant.
i-04: Drooping is not done at less than this torque.

81

Chapter 3

Explanation of function setting items

Speed/frequency

Spd4

Droop ratio
invariable

Spd3

Set speed/frequency

Spd2

Droop amountinvariable

Spd1
Output torqueDroop control characteristic(2)

Machine loss compensation setting (vector control)

Display

i-05
i-06
i-07

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Selection of machineloss compensation
Machine loss offset
Machine loss inclination

0 OFF
1 ON
0〜100
0〜100

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

OFF
1
1

0
0

%

At the times of overtorque protection and droop control, torque control deducting component of i-06 machine loss offset andi-07 machine loss inclination can be done.
Note) Machine loss compensation for torque command input at the time of torque control is not done. Also, torque command
monitor display is not compensated.
i-05: Select active/inactive of machine loss compensation. (In case of inaction,settings of i-06 and i-07 become ineffective.
i-06: Set offset quantity of machine loss component in case of 0 speed,making rated torque as 100%.
i-07: Set motor speed proportion component of machine loss, by torque at the time of max. speed.

82

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

4-11. Setting Item J Communication option setting(common)
DisplayJ-00

Use selection of communication option

J-01

ASYC64 communication speed

J-02

RSH64 communication speed

J-03----No. of frame of input(Inverter → master office)No. of frame of output(Inverter → master office)

J-04
J-05
J-00

J-00〜05

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

0: OFF
1: ON
0: 1200bps
1: 2400bps
2: 4800bps
3: 9600bps
4: 19200bps
5: 38400bps

Unit

-

OFF

-

-

2

-

-

3

-

-

0

-

3〜19

1

14

-

2〜12

1

6

-

0: 125kbps
1: 250kbps
2: 500kbps
3: 1Mbps:This is use selection of communication option. When this setting is OFF, Inverter does not work even if communication option is selected at speed command and operation command position (speed command is 0).
Also, When this setting is turned to ON, VFC64 P.C.Board checks the status of option.
If this setting is turned to ON under situation of no connection of communication option, "option error"occurs
and Inverter trips, for which please pay attention.
:These are settings related to communication. For details, see Manuals of each communication option.

4-12. Setting Item L 2nd motor parameter setting, 2nd speed control gain
VF64 Inverter has "2nd motor functin" to use 2 different motors alternately changing by contact, setting their rating,constant and speed control system gain in advance.
By turning to ON of [2nd motor selection] of multifunction input, following data are used instead of each data of ordinary motor.
Note) Changeover of multifunction input should be done while Inverter is stopped. Changeover cannot be done during operation (including DC braking and initializing) of Inverter.
(1) Use selection of 2nd motor function (common)
Display
L-00

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Use selection of 2nd motor function

0: OFF
1: ON

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
-

OFF

Unit
-

By turning of this setting to ON, 2nd motor functions become effective. In the status of OFF of setting, 2nd motor does notstarts even if multifunction input [2nd motor selection] is turned to ON.

83Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(2) Setting of rating plate values, cooling fan and PG pulse of 2nd motor (common)
Display

L-01

Setting range(selection item)

Content(vector control)(Capacities from rated capacity of Inverterr till thatof 3 ranks lower in VF64 capacity can be set)

(V/f control)

0〜Inverter rated capacity

2nd motor capacity(vector control)

L-02

2nd motor
rated voltage

L-03

2nd motor
rated current

L-04

2nd motor
rated speed

L-05

Selection of pole of 2nd motor

L-06

2nd motor
rated frequency

L-07
L-08

(V/f control)

140〜230(200V class)280〜460(400V class)Setting Initializing
resolution
data
0.0
0.1

0〜150% of Inverter rated current(vector control) 400〜12000(V/f control)(vector control)(V/f control)

2nd motor cooling fan selection(sensorless vector control mode only)
Number of 2nd motor PG pulse(vector control mode with sensor only)

400 〜24000

Inverterrating

kW

0
1

200V
400V

V

0.0

(vector control) 40〜150% of Inverter rated current(V/f control)

Unit

0.1

1

2〜12 [Pole]-

Rated speed x pole/120〜 rated speed x pole/120+7.0

0.1

Inverterrating
0
1760
4
0.0

A

r/min
Pole
Hz

60.0

15.0〜max. frequency(A-00)
0: Self cooling fan
1: Forced cooling fan

-

0

-

60〜3600

1

600

P/R

Note) At the time of initializing in V/f control, typical value of same capacity of motor with that of Inverter is set.
Set rating plate values, cooling fan and PG pulse number of 2nd motor. At the time of selection of 2nd motor, these values
are replaced by each settings A-02〜A-09 of ordinary motors. In case of auto-tuning work of 2nd motor, these values arenecessary to be set in advance. (As to details of each setting, see items of A-02〜A-09)(3) Electric constant of 2nd motor (common)(common)
Display
L-09

Content
2nd motor primary resistanceSetting range(selection item)
Setting range, resolution differ depending on Inverter capacity

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
-

0

Unit
MΩ

Note) In case of initializing by V/f control mode, typical value is set in the initializing data depending on capacity. (However, since actual value differ depending on Inverter and motor, reset by auto-tuning to the utmost.) In vector control mode, all are initialized to 0.
(vector control)
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

L-10

2nd motor 2ndary resistance

0

mΩ

L-11

2nd motor leakage inductance

0

mH

L-12

2nd motor mutual inductance

0

mH

L-13

2nd motor inductance saturation compensation 1

0

%

L-14

2nd motor inductance saturation compensation 2

0

%

L-15

2nd motor iron loss conductance

0.0〜600.0

0.0

0.0

mho

L-16

2nd motor loss factor 1

0.0〜200.0

0.0

0.0

%

L-17

2nd motor loss factor 2

0.0〜200.0

0.0

0.0

%

The above is setting of electric constant of 2nd motor. At the time of selection of 2nd motor, these settings are replaced by
settings of A-17〜A-25 of ordinary motor. Also, when auto-tuning of 2nd motor is executed, these data are set automatically.
(As to details of each items, see items of A-17〜A-25)

84

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items(4) 2nd motor speed control adjustment gain (vector control)
Display

Setting range(selection item)

Content

L-18

2nd speed control proportional gain

L-19
L-20

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

3〜100

1

15

2nd speed control integration time constant 20〜10000

140

2nd motor control inertia moment

1

100〜32767

Unit

At the time of selection of 2nd motor, different speed control gain from ordinary motor is used. When 2nd motor is selected,
speed control gain is replaced by basic setting items 7. ASrP, 8.ASri, 9.ASrJ, and L-18〜L-20 are used.
(As to details of each gain, see items of 7.ASrP, 8.ASri, 9.ASrJ)(5) Auto-tuning of 2nd motor (common)
For execution of auto-tuning of 2nd motor:1) Turn L-00 (Selection of 2nd motor function) to ON.
2) Set each of settings of L-01〜L-08.
3) Turn multifunction input terminal, which selected multifunction input [2nd motor selection], to ON.
4) Make auto-tuning in accordance with [Order of auto-tuning] of item of Setting Item A.
(Display of console at this time is [tun2] instead of ordinary [tun])5) Since data are set at each of settings of L-09〜L-17 (L-09 only in case of DC mode) instead of A-11〜A-25,
confirm it supplying the power source.
Note) Even if auto-tuning only of 2nd motor is executed, Inverter cannot be operated since A-11〜A-16 (dead timecorrection quantity) and correction table are not set.
Therefore, execute [auto-tuning of ordinary motor] in advance.

4-13. Setting Item n Monitor setting(1) Line speed setting (common)
Displayn-00

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Line speed monitor adjustment

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

0〜20000

1

0

Unit
-

Adjust display gain of console [Line speed] monitor.
Set line speed at the time of max. speed/frequency (A-00).
Display of line speed monitor is:Motor speed x (n-00) / (A-00) (vector control)
Output frequency x (n-00) / (A-00) (V/f control)(2) Monitor setting for our adjustment (common)
Displayn-01〜09

Setting range(selection item)

Content
Monitor setting for our adjustment-

Setting Initializing
resolution
data
-

-

Unit
-

Monitor setting item for adjustment in our factory. Usually, keep the status of the time of delivery.

4-14. Setting Item P Setting area of super block constant
Display

Content

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution
data

Unit

P-000
Setting of super block constant〜259[Setting Item P] is Constant setting area of super block function. As to details, see explanatory leaflet of super block
function. (When super block function is not used, this setting is not necessary)85

Chapter 3 Explanation of function setting items

4-15. Setting Item S

Special setting item

(1) VDC detection gain (common)
Display
S-00

Setting range(selection item)

Content
VDC detection gain

0.0〜200.0

Setting Initializing
resolution data
0.1

Unit
%

The above is detection adjustment gain of DC voltage which Inverter detects. Adjust this gain in case that display of console
monitor [Vdc] is different from voltage between main circuit terminal block [ + 2] - [ - ].
Note) At the time of initializing, by inputting of voltage between [ + 2] - [ - ] at that time, this Vdc detection gain is counted
backward and set. Use this gain as it is usually.
If main circuit P.C.Boards (GAC61 or MAC61, etc.) are replaced, there may be a case that [Vdc] display of console isdislocated from the voltage between [ + 2] - [ - ]. In such case, adjust VDC detection gain by this setting, without
initializing the memory.
(2) Inverter control mode (common)
Display

S-01

Setting range(selection item)

Content

Inverter control mode

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

VF64S
VF64V
VF64

By reading of this setting, set control mode of Inverter can be confirmed.
VF64S : Speed sensorless vector control mode
VF64V : Vector control mode with speed sensor
VF64 : V/f control (open control) mode
Note) This setting is read only and "write" is not available (always "write" is inhibited). In case of changeover of Inverter
control mode, execute changeover operation of Inverter control mode or initializing (default) of memory.

(3) Inverter capacity, voltage series (common)
Display
S-02

Content
Inverter capacity,voltage class

Setting range(selection item)

Setting Initializing
resolution data

Unit

1r122〜18022
1r144〜100044

By reading of this setting, set capacity and voltage class of Inverter can be confirmed.

Voltage class (22: 200V class, 44: 400V class)
Nominal capacity (kW) (r shows decimal point)Note) This setting is read only and "write" is not available (always "write" is inhibited).In case of change (by exchange ofspare parts, etc.) of Inverter capacity, voltage class set on P.C.Board, it is necessary to do from the initializing of
memory. If Inverter capacity, voltage class set on P.C.Board do not match the capacity,voltage class of Inverter fittingthat P.C.Board, normal control cannot be done and could result in trouble, for which please pay attention.

86

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

Chapter 4 Selection of peripheral devices and options
1. Selection guide(Note 3)
DC Reactor
Circuit breaker or
earth leakage breaker
Power source(Note 1,2)

AC
ReactorSine wave
converter
VF61R

Transformer

Electro-magnetic
Noise filter
contactor(Input side)(Note 1,5)

Type

Name
Peri- AC reactor
pheraldevice Noise filter

AL
NF3
MIF3

Zero phasereactorDC reactor

RC
F
DCL

Sine wave
converter

VF61R

Dynamic brakeunit
Resistor
Thermal relay

VFDB5
R
TH-

(Note.4)
Electro-magnetic
contactor
Filter condense(△connect)

Resistor(Note 3)
Dynamic brake unit

Thermal relay
Zero phase reactor
VF64
Inverter↓Electro-magnetic
contactor(Output side)
Induction(Note 5) motor

Application
Remarks
Apply for the cases of input power factor improvement and For input side
suppression of distorted wave form.
connection
Apply for reduction of electro-magnetic noise generated
For input sidefrom Inverter.
connection
NF3
is noise filter for attenuation of high band.
MIF3
is noise filter to comply with CE marking.
Zero phase reactor is noise filter in case that it corresponds For output side
to EMS of EN55011 in EC mark.
connection
Apply for the case of improvement of input power factor
Connect between＋ 1〜 ＋ 2
DC reactor is standard accessory for VF64-1522, ED64sp-2244
or over and is Option for Inverters of less than these capacities.
Apply for Inverter
Apply for the case that drastic remodeling,power factor
improvement of power source regeneration braking, input side
power source harmonic are necessary. In case of use ofsine wave converter, it is necessary. to fit ACL for
converter. AS there are kinds of capacity, please refer tocatalog and instruction manual of VF61R.
Apply for the case that braking of Inverter is necessary.
At the time of application,use combining with dynamic
brake unit, resistor and thermal relay. (As to types of
VF64-1122 or less and VF64-1544 or less, dynamic
brake unit is incorporated.

Connect between ＋ 2〜 −Types incorporating
dynamic brake unit
should connect resistor
and thermal
relay between B〜 ＋ 2

Note 1) For selection of circuit breaker,input/output side electro-magnetic contactor and size of wiring, see next page.
Note 2) As to earth leakage circuit breaker, use the product which complied with high harmonic.
Note 3) DCL is standard accessory for Inverters of 200V class 15kW (VF64-1522) or over and 400V class 22kW (VF64-2244)
or over. DCL is option for Inverters of less than these capacities. However, DCL and dynamic brake unit (including
resistor, thermal relay) are unnecessary in case that sine wave converter is used.
Note 4) Filter condenser and magnetic contactor for closing of filter condenser are needed when sine wave converter (VF61R)
is used. Electromagnetic contactor for closing is used to turn to ON when sine wave converter is operated and to
OFF when that converter is stopped.
Note 5) Please use electro magnetic contactors of input side and output side in accurdance with applications.

87

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

2. Input/output devices and wiringClass

earth wireClassearth wire88

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

3. AC Reactor
For AC Reactor of Inverter input side, use types of the table below.
class

class

Mass

89

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

4. Noise filter
4-1. Noise filter (Option)
As to noise filter of Inverter input side, use types of the table below, (Regarding noise filter complying with CE marking, use
types shown in next page.)90

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

5. DC Reactor
DC Reactor is separately supplied as option for VF64-1122 or less of 200V class and VF64-1544 or less of 400V class.
DC Reactor of separate installation type is equipped as standard for VF64-1522 or over of 200V class and VF64-2244 orover of 400V class. See [chaper9 item4-2] of external form dimension.

6. VF61R/VF64R Sine wave converter
In cases of regeneration of energy at the time of brake torque and improvement of input power factor and of distortion rate isrequired, power regenerative sine wave converter can be used. We prepare VF61R or VF64R (under development) series
as sine wave converter unit. For details, please contact our sales division or see [Instruction Manual of VF61R Sine Wave
Converter] of separate issue.

7. Dynamic brake unit (DB unit)
If sine wave converter is not used in case of need of brake torque, dynamic brake unit (DB unit) is used for disposing ofgenerated energy. In case of VF64, units of 200V class 11kW (VF64-1122) capacity or less and 400V class 15kW (VF64-1544)
capacity or less incorporate the transistor for dynamic braking and by adding the resistor and protection relay atexternal,dynamic braking can be performed. In case of higher types of aforesaid ones, dynamic brake unit (DB unit) should
be used. For details, please contact our sales division or see [Instruction Manual of Dynamic brake (DB unit)] of separate
issue.

91

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

7-1. Dynamic brake unit (Option)
Standard table dynamic brake unit, resistor and relay correspond to the capacity of Inverter.
Type of Inverter
Motor capacity
DB unitMax. braking
power

1R1
2R2
1.1
2.2
Built-in type

3R7
3.7

2.9

3.2

9.8

1.2

5R5
5.5

VF64-□□22 200V class
11
15
22
30
37
45
11
15
22
30
37
45
Use separate type(Type VFDB2002-50)

7R5
7.5

75
90
55
75
90
55
Use separate Type×2parallelly

13.1

17.3

34.6

Ave. braking
power

0.04

0.08

0.16

0.2

0.24

0.4

0.8

Type, q'ty(＊2)
of brake resistor

200W
100Ω
×1S

200W
22Ω
×2S

200W
10Ω
×4S

250W 3.3Ω×4S

400W
3.3Ω
×3S

400W 1.5Ω×5S

400W 1.5Ω×5S×2sets

Thermal setting

1.0

2.4

3.5

7.5

8.5

13.0

13.0

＊1.Types of VF64-1522 or over use DB unit(separate type). VF64-1122 or less incorporate DB unit circuit. ＊2.2S shown in table means use of 2 resistor connected in series.
Type of Inverter
Motor capacity
DB unitMax. braking
power

1R1
2R2
1.1
2.2
Built-in type

3R7
3.7

1.3

5.9

2.6

5R5
5.5

7R5
7.5

8.6

11
11

15
15

VF64-□□44 400V class
22
30
37
45
55
22
30
37
45
55
Use separate type(Type VFDB2002-50)

75
75

110
160
200
250
315
110
160
200
250
315
Use separate Type×2parallelly

15.2

22.4

44.8

0.24

0.4

0.56

1.1

200W 10Ω
×6S

400W 6.8Ω
×5S

400W 3.3Ω×7S

400W 3.3Ω×7S×2sets

6.0

8.5

8.5

Ave. braking
power

0.04

0.08

0.16

Type, q'ty(＊2)
of brake resistor

200W
500Ω
×1S

200W
100Ω
×2S

200W
22Ω
×4S

Thermal setting

0.6

1.2

2.4

3.5

＊1.Types of VF64-2244 or over use DB unit(separate type). VF64-1544 or less incorporate DB unit circuit. ＊2.2S shown in table means use of 2 resistor connected in series.
Large capacity
dynamic brake unit
Voltage class
Max. braking
power

17.3

34.6

51.9

69.2

22.4

44.8

67.2

89.6

112

134.4

Ave. braking
power

0.4

0.8

1.2

1.6

0.56

1.1

1.68

2.24

2.8

3.36

VF64DB2002-200
200V class

400V class

Type, q'ty(＊2)
400W 1.5Ω（400W 1.5Ω（400W 1.5Ω（400W 1.5Ω 400W 3.3Ω（400W 3.3Ω（400W 3.3Ω（400W 3.3Ω（400W 3.3Ω（400W 3.3Ωof brake resistor
×5S）
×2P ×5S）×3P ×5S）
×4P
×6P
×5S
×7S）
×2P ×7S）×3P ×7S）×4P ×7S）×5P ×7S）
×7S
N60A type N60A type N60A type
N60A type N60A type N60A type N60A type N60A type
Thermal setting
13.0
8.5
26.0
39.0
50.0
50.0
17.0
25.0
34.0
42.0

＊1.The combination which it's maximum braking power exceeds 1.5 times of the inverter capacity cannot be done. ＊2.Two parallel running or more is also possible.

●Outline of DB unit, Type:VFDB2002-50●Outline form of thermal relay
Mounting holefor 2-M4

15

Cover(Option)

130
140

100

FUN/
DB SET
RUN 86A

Screw withspringMain circuit
terminal

Screw withspring
The above-mentioned value is for N20.
The numerical value ( )is for N60.

15

Terminal forcontrol

113.2
124●Outline of brake resistor

130
137

Mounting hole

●Outline form of DB unit, Type:VFDB2002-200
Cover (Option)●Dimension table of brake resistor

25

Dimension
capacity

100
150

FUN/
DB SET
RUN 86A

40

25

190

Terminal forcontrol

145
160

Mounting hole

Main circuit
terminal

134
239
249

（mm）

L1

L2

H

D

E

200W

306

331

49.5

28

8.2

250W

343

358

59.0

40

4.5

400W

380

408

82.0

50

9.5

(Note 1) Use twisted wire for connection and make wiring as
short as possible.
(Note 2) As brake resistor becomes hot (about 200℃), mount itat the well ventilated place and don't put inflamablematerials at its surroundings.
(Note 3) Installation of resistors, in case of series connection of
brake resistors,should be done securing a space of100mm or more between center of resistors in both lateral placement and stacking arrangement.

92

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

7-2. Connection example of dynamic brake circuit● Connection example of DB unit built-in type

● Connection example of separate type DB unit
VFDB2002-□□□

DCL

Unused

RUN
DB
86A
SLAVE

1

MASTER

3

P

2
4

DBR
PR

86A

N

FAULT

76

+1 +2

SHT

5
6
7
8

76

※1

52
MAX

-

9

RUN

R

U

S

V

T

W

Speed/
frequency settingIME

run command
Speed/
frequency setting

1

PS

0-10

ST-F

run command

GND
1
2

52MA

※1

52
MAX

● Connection example of DB unit

● Connection example use of plural number ofbuilt-in type with separate type DB unit

separate type DB unit

VFDB2002-□□□
RUN
DB
86A

VFDB2002-□□□
RUN
DB
86A
SLAVE
P

2

MASTER

3

PR
N

76

N

FAULT

RUN

52
MAX

5
6
7
8

76

9

RUN

9

VFDB2002-□□□

Unused

RUN
DB
86A

U

S

V

T

W

IM
DCL

P

76

N
※1

PS

0-10

ST-F

GND

run command

2
52
MAX

-

5
6
FAULT 7
86A

8

76
RUN

9

U

R

1
52MA

+1 +2

SHT

2
3
4

PR

76

1

1

SLAVE
MASTER

DBR

E

Speed/
frequency
setting

86A

8+2 B RPR

5
6
FAULT 7

2
3
4

DBR

86A

76

※1

P

4

DBR

SHT

52
MAX

1

SLAVE
MASTER

1

S

V

T

W

※1

IM

E

Speed/
frequency setting

PS

1

ST-F

0-10

run command

GND
1
52MA

2
52
MAX

※1

Note.1) Please run/stop the contact point of 52MAX at the same time as the drive contact point of VF64 (Terminal ①-②). The lowpower
relay must be used as the one for this contact point.
Note.2) VFDB2002-□□□ can be applied to both 200V class and 400V class. Please change the connection with the jumper (CN4,5,
CN7,8) and switch voltage with the indicator.
Note.3) It is necessary to set the slave machine with the indicator when using in parallel. Please refer its detail to the instruction manual.

93Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

8. Corresponding standards
8-1. Noise filter complying with CE marking (Option)
Please use the inverter and Noise filter by the following combination to suit the EMC(Electromagnetic
Compatibility) instruction of Europe. Noise filter is connected with the input of the inverter, and pleasestore on the control board and use the inverter and Noise filter. Application is possible the performance(attenuation characteristic) more than the equal application Noise filter a even if it is not the following,recommended goods.EMC agreement standard suits following PDS(Power Drive Systems).
ＥＭＩ （Ｅｍｉ
ｓｓ
ｉ
ｏｎ）
：Ｎｏ
ｒｍａ
ｔ
ｉ
ｖｅ Ｓｔ
ａｎｄａ
ｒｄ ＥＮ６１８００-３
ＥＭＳ（Ｉｍｍｕｎ
ｉ
ｔ
ｙ）：Ｎｏ
ｒｍａ
ｔ
ｉ
ｖｅ Ｓｔ
ａｎｄａ
ｒｄ ＥＮ６１８００-３
Please add common-mode reactor (core) besides above-mentioned Noise filter to the inverter unit output
line in the form of a common mode (three aspect batch penetration) when you clear standard EN55011
with EMS(Emission).
Note:Please arrange in the vicinity of the inverter output terminal, and roll number (T) of turns of tables
below in common-mode reactor.
Note:Please refer to the manual for details for EMC.

200V class noise filter complying with CE marking (option)
EN55011

EN55011
EN61800-3

EN61800-3
Type ofInverter

Noise filter

Commonmode reactor

Type ofInverter

VF64-1R122
VF64-2R222
VF64-3R722
VF64-5R522
VF64-7R522
VF64-1122
VF64-1522

FN3258-16-45
FN3258-30-47
FN3258-30-47
FN3258-55-52
FN3258-75-52
FN3258-75-52

RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T

VF64-2222
VF64-3022
VF64-3722
VF64-4522
VF64-5522
VF64-7522
VF64-9022

Commonmode reactor
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T
F6045GB x 1T
F6045GB x 1T
F6045GB x 1T
F6045GB x 1T
F140100PB x 1T
F140100PB x 1T

Noise filter
FN3258-100-35
FN3258-130-35
FN3258-180-40
FN3259-250-28
FN3259-250-28
FN3259-400-99
FN3259-400-99

400V class noise filter complying with CE marking (option)
EN55011

EN55011
EN61800-3

EN61800-3
Type ofInverter

Noise filter

Commonmode reactor

Type ofInverter

VF64-1R144
VF64-2R244
VF64-3R744
VF64-5R544
VF64-7R544
VF64-1144
VF64-1544
VF64-2244
VF64-3044
VF64-3744
VF64-4544

FN3258-7-45
FN3258-16-45
FN3258-30-47
FN3258-30-47
FN3258-42-47
FN3258-42-47
FN3258-55-52
FN3258-75-52
FN3258-100-35
FN3258-130-35

RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T60
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 3T
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T
RC5060 x 2Pcs x 3T
F6045GB x 1T

VF64-5544
VF64-7544
VF64-11044
VF64-16044
VF64-20044
VF64-25044
VF64-31544
VF64-40044
VF64-50044
VF64-60044
VF64-75044

Noise filter
FN3258-130-35
FN3258-180-40
FN3259-320-45
FN3259-400-45
FN3259-600-45
FN3259-600-45
FN3259-1000-99
FN3259-600-99 x 2Pcs
FN3259-600-99 x 2Pcs
FN3259-600-99 x 3Pcs
FN3259-600-99 x 3Pcs

Commonmode reactor
F6045GB x 1T
F140100PB x 2T
F140100PB x 2T
F140100PB x 2Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 3Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 3Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 5Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 6Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 6Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 9Pcs x 1T
F140100PB x 9Pcs x 1T

94

Chapter 4

Selection of peripheral devices and options

8-2. Common mode reactor

type

Dimension

Weight(g)8-3. Filter external form
Fig.A

Fig.B

Fig.C

type

type

95

Dimension

Dimension

Fig

Fig

Weight(g)Weight(g)Chapter 5 Function-up option

Chapter 5 Function-up option●Table of Options
Name

Type

●Fitting position of P.C.Board for Option
Application

Remarks

Standard console
SET64

Function Extension cable CBL64-L□ 3 kinds of 1m/3m/5m are available
up
Metal fitting to be used for
Metal fitting
mounting of SET64OP or SET64
of consoleon panel, etc.
Isolation
input card

ISO64

Input
contact

OPTION

IO64
Isolation
input output card
Motor temperaturedetection

T/V61V＊1

Apply for motor start torque Mount incompensaion and motor protec- VF64.
tion.

Network JEMA-Net

OPCN64

ASYC64

Device-Net

DNET64

P.C.Board
OPTION for motor
T/V61V temperaturedetection

VFC2001 control

Mount oneof them on
Analog isolation 1 input/ 1 VFC2001.
output are equipped.

RS422/485
RS232C

P.C.Board for

Analog isolation 2 inputs areequipped.

ISO64
or IO64

Speed
setting

Speed
meter
AnalogoutputFor input output
of external signal
Multifunction input
and sequence input

Comply with OPCN-1
compliance class TYPE-S521. Select one
Kind of themand mount
Communication of start/stop
exchanging
synchronous serial system can P.C.Board
be executed.
VF64TB.

VFC64TB

Multifunction output
and sequence output(standard)

In case of use of network option,exchange above
VFC64TB for P.C.Board below.

Mount any one of
OPCN64/ASYC64/
DNET64/PBUS64

PROFIBUS PBUS64（＊1）Owing to the limited space,T/V61V cannot be added to the following models as option,VF64-1R122 ,2R222 ,3R722 ,1R144 ,2R244 ,3R744.

1. Extension cable and metal fitting
Extension cable

Metal fitting

Type

To be used when standard console (SET64) is fitted to the

CBL64-L1

1m

CBL64-L33m

CBL64-L55m

external(Control panel door, etc.)(SET64)

Outline dimension

metal fitting

Panel cut dimension
4-φ5 hole

5

175

165
155

VF64

120

4

100
108

96

Chapter 5 Function-up option

2. Isolated input card : ISO64

ISO64 can be used as input of HC function andsequence function and, as input of feedback signal ofpressure control and air volume control.
(Note1) As to ISO64 and IO64,please select and use
any one of them.

VFC2001●Specification
Function
Isolated analog input (1)Isolated analog input (2)Kind of input

Input resistance

Input terminal

Remarks−10V〜0V〜＋10V

69KΩ

4-3（0V）—

0V〜＋10V

150KΩ

1-3（0V）

SW1-OFF

4〜20mA250Ω

2-3（0V）

SW1-ON

3. Isolated input output card : IO64
IO64 can be used as input output of HC function andsequence function, and as input output of feedback
signal of pressure control and air volume control.
(Note1) As to ISO64 and IO64, please select and use
any one of them.
(Note2) Insulation analog input is 0V〜+10V when it isused as speed command input and is -10V〜0V〜10V
when it is used as torque command input.
VFC2001

−10V
10V〜
〜0V
0V〜＋
〜＋10V
(or 4〜
4〜20mA)input

0V

−10V
10V〜
〜0V
0V〜＋
〜＋10V
(or 4〜
4〜20mA)output

0V●Specification
Function
Isolated analog input

lsolated analog output

Kind of input output

Input resistanceLoad resistance

Input Output terminal

Remarks−10V〜0V〜＋10V

150KΩ

—

1-2（0V）

SW1-OFF

4〜20mA250Ω

—

1-2（0V）

SW1-ON

4〜20mA—

500Ω or less3-4（0V）

SW2-OFF−10V〜0V〜＋10V—

10kΩ or over

3-4（0V）

SW2-ON(Note) Minus voltage input is in the time only when it is used as torque command

97

Chapter 6

Communication system-up option

4. Motor temperature compensation : T/V61V
By incorporating of our own motor temperaturecompensation system (Patent Pending) and function tomeasure and set variance of motor electric constantautomatically, which was problem point of conventional
vector Inverter control, Linearity and Reproducibility
are improved drastically.
Other functions:・When motor temperature exceeds 150℃,Inverter is stopped.
・Displays motor temperature on console panel.

(Note 1) In case of fitting of temperature compensation option,
it is necessary to mount temperature detector (PT100
equivalent 3 wires type resistance thermometer).
Please designate motor with thermometry resistor.
(Note 2) Use twisted shielded cable for connection of temperaturedetector and temperature compensation option.
(Note 3) Temperature compensation option(T/V61V) can not be
used for VF64-1R122,2R222,3R722,1R144,2R244,
and 3R744.

Motor

Chapter 6 Communication system up option
1. OPCN64 : OPCN-1(JPCN-1) compliance
By use of OPCN64, VF64 Inverter can perform drive command, speed command, setting/ drive monitoring, etc. of kinds ofparameter with upper CPU system and personal computer・PLC via communication circuit highly speedy.
ItemSpecification

Power source

Supply from isolated control powersource of VF64 Inverter

Data link layer

Network specification OPCN-1

Electric characteristicof physical layer

Based on RS485

Connection form

Bus type (multi drop system)

Object device ofcommunication

Devices having specification of master
office of OPCN-1

OPCN64 adopted Standard Specification OPC N-1 which
was recommended by The Japan Electrical Manufacturers'
Association and communication protocol is based on thespecification of the slave office. VF64 can performconnection・control with other maker s・different types thathave master office function of OPC N-1, in addition to ourPLC ( μ GPCsx), needless to say. OPCN64 obtained[Authentication No.J990908JPCNS031]. Control programcanbe made at customer side.As Instruction Manual isprepared, please contact us.

Speed is set by console of VF64
main body
Transmission speed and 125kbps：within 1000m
250kbps：within 800m
transmission distance
500kbps：within 480m
1Mbps ：within 240m
Class of adaptability

TYPE-S52I

Synchronous method

Frame synchronous method

Coding method

NRZI

Setting of Local Number

Among 01-7F, 31 offices (selectable by rotaryswitch)which are not overlapped with other office

Number of connection office Max. 31 offices for master office of 1unit
Connection/wiring method Terminal block (5 poles), 2 wires type or 3 wires type
Data form

Bit data by frame composition

Error detection

FCS system (frame inspection sequence)

Recommendable cable CO−SPEV（SB）−0.5Ý×2P

98

Chapter 6

Communication system-up option

2. ASYC64 : Complied with RS232C/RS485 start-stop synchronous serial communication
ASYC64 is an option for communication network by start/stop synchronous communication(max. 19200bps).It can control and monitor
upper CPU system, PLC and personal computer communication line.See [Instruction Manual of ASYC64] of another volume.

VF64 Inverter bySpecification
Item
Supply from isolated control power source of VF64 Inverter
Power source
Elec. characteristic of physical layer RS422/RS485 compliant RS232 compliant
Transmission distance 1000m
3m
1 : max. 31 units
No. of office
1：1
Communication control system Polling/selecting system Polling system
1200/2400/4800/9600/ 1200/2400/4800/9600/
Communication
19200/38400bps
speed
19200bps
Transmission procedure Semi-double (no procedure) Semi-double (no procedure)
Terminal block (M3)
Connection form
Connector(5051-04 of MOLEX)
Data length ASCII (7 bits)
Data typeStart bit
(1 bit)Parity check(1 bit even number)
Stop bit(1 bit)Error detection
Sum check

3. DNET64 : Complied with DeviceNet
DNET64, being network option board of VF64, can beconnected with DeviceNet of open network standard and offers communication function as a
DeviceNet slave device.
DeviceNet is lower network to connect simple device (sensor, actuator) for industrial use and upper device (controller).
Also, DeviceNet is open network standard and its specification and protocol are opened by Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc .(ODVA) and offers
mutual compatible connection between devices of same kind by plural vendors.
This product was tested at test laboratory of the third party, which was authorized by by ODVA, and recognized adaptation to conformance test
software Ver.A-14 of ODVA.
ItemCommunication
function of DeviceNet
Vendor ID
Device profile
Setting range of MAC ID
Connection form
Communication function

Transmission speed andtransmission

Specification
Slave function
178
AC Drive
00〜63
T branch, DG chain connection
1/0 message
Polling
Explicit message
Group2 Only server, Overlap MAC ID
125kbps : within 500m
250kpbs : within 250m
500kpbs : within 100m

4. PBUS64 : Complied with PROFIBUS
PBUS64, being an option of VF64 series, is communication option to connect VF64 Inverter with network of PROFIBUS, the world standard of field bus.
PROFIBUS is the standard of open type field bus, without dependence on vendor, which is used in wide range of actuator/sensor-leis regulated by International Standard IEC61158.
PBUS64 has function of PROFIBUS-DP slave and can control, monitor VF64 Inverter from other master station.
PBUS64 is PROFIDRIVE-Profile compliant and can use PRO-Type 1 5.
PBUS64 passed Authentification Test of TEST-LAB., recognized officially by PROFIBUS Association and was approved by PROFIBUS Association.
SpecificationItemsupply from isolated control power source of VF64 Inverter
Power source
Communication protocol PROFIBUS-DP slave
RS485 compliant
Physical layer
Connection form
Bus type
Object device of P communication Devices having specification of PROFIBUS-DP masterTransmission speed and 9.6kbps : within 1200m
transmission distance
19.2kbps : within 1200m
93.75kbps : within 1200m
187.5kbps : within 1000m
500kbps : within 400m
1.5Mbps : within 200m
3Mbps
: within 100m
6Mbps
: within 100m
12Mbps : within 100m
Station number setting Setting by console of VF64

99

Chapter 7

System-up option

Making the most of our experience of developed VF64 Inverter as the product which can perform to meet the demand of
market. We also prepared following system-up options as the function to pursue the easiness in use of Inverter. In order to
use these function, special technology to structure the system is required. In case of use of these functions, PC Tool
(separate sale) such as dedicated Editor, etc., which are operated on personal computer, is needed. In case of handling of
PC Tool, please consult our sales division.

1. HC (High speed control) function
This function consists of:1) Numerical value operation part, called [Super block].
2) Function to link mutual input/output between plural super blocks.
3) Processing part to link the discretional data of input/output of super blocks.
By super block editor (separate sale) to be operated by personal computer, the most suitable motor drive system to theapplications of customer can be structured prepared in VF64 in advance.
For details, see [Instruction of super block editor] in [PC Tool Manual] of separate issue.

2. Sequence (PLC) function
Sequence function is the function to edit the sequence of VF64 inside by sequence editor (separate sale), which operates by
personal computer, using ladder circuit, and to control transposing with standard sequence incorporated in VF64.

By thisfunction, the most suitable sequence to customers' application can be structured in VF64 inside, and it is possible to omit
PLC and a part of relay circuit, which were necessary so far.
For details, see [Instruction of sequence editor] in [PC Tool Manual] of separate issue.

3. Trace back monitor function
Trace back function is to memorize the status of running at the time of protective operation of VF64 and information of 16chof component of current, voltage, etc. of each phase at the time of protective operation, in the Inverter inside. By this function,
it is possible to analyze the cause of trouble of Inverter and system, and carry out restoration in short time. Trace backmonitor function is to display the memory data of this trace back on the screen of personal computer, using [trace backmonitor tool software] (separate sale).
For details, see [Instruction manual of trace back monitor] in [PC Tool Manual] of separate issue.

4. Trend monitor function
Trend monitor function is the function to display the internal sequence signal such as operation command and protective
operation signal, etc. of VF64 inside as well as internal data such as effective value current, voltage, etc., on the screen of
personal computer on real time. Since it is possible to display each output data of super block, which were put in using
aforesaid HC function, in addition to the standard internal data, this function can be used for checking, etc. of operation
status of the system and also for debugging of circuit put in by HC function. For using of this function, [Trend monitor tool
software] (separate sale), which is operated on personal computer, is needed.
For details, see [Instruction manual of trend back monitor] in [PC Tool Manual] of separate volume.

5. Console data setting function
This is function to perform read/write of console setting of VF64 at the same time by personal computer. Also, it is possible
to copy the setting data between Inverters. For using of this function, [Trend monitor tool software] (separate sale), which isoperated on personal computer, is needed.
For details, see [Instruction manual of console data set] in [PC Tool Manual] of separate issue .

100

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

Main circuit DC
part fuse melting
in a unit＊ The power supply
wasconneected to theinverter
output.
＊ IGBT (IPM) was damaged by acertain cause.
＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of
the output wiring cable.
＊ The dynamic brake circuit was
damaged.

＊ The check of input-and-output
wiring.
＊ The conduction check of IGBT
(IPM).
＊ Exchange of damage parts anda fuse.
＊ Exchange of a unit.

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

Fu

1R122˜
9022
1R144˜
31544
15022˜
18022
40044˜
100044Fu

Main circuit DC
part fuse melting
in a master unit
Fu

Main circuit DC
part fuse melting
in a slave unitoLAllmodelsProtection
operates when thecurrent of 150% or
equivalent ofmotor rated
current flows to an
inverter output for
1 minute.

＊ Load capacity is unusuallylarge.
＊ Selection of an inverter andmotor capacities is not correct.
＊ The setting value of load rate ofover load protection is
unsuitable.
＊ The motor is stalled.
(V/f control mode).
＊ The setting value of the numberof PG pulse is incorrect (only incase of vector control mode witha speed sensor).
＊ Wiring of PG is not normal.
Phase A and B are reverse(control with sensor).
＊ Setting of each rating of motor
is not suitable.

＊ Prectical use of over load prealarm function (C-16).
＊ Mitigation of load.
Revision of an inverter andmotor capacities.
＊ Revision of the setting value ofthe overload protection setting(F-03).
＊ Adjustment of torque limit value(E-00〜03).
＊ Revision of the setting value ofthe number (A-09) of PG pulse.
＊ Check the wiring and directionof rotation of PG (control withsensor).
＊ Revision of setting value ofmotor rated setting (A-02〜07 or
L-01〜06).

FcL

All
modelsProtection
operates whenabout 290%
current of inverter
rating flows to an
inverter output forseveral seconds.

＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of＊ The check of output wiring.

All
modelsWhen about 350%
or more of thecurrent of inverter
rating flows to an
inverter output,
protection
operates
immediately.

the output wiring cable.
＊ Acceleration and deceleration
times are too short (V / fcontrol).
＊ Load capacity is unusuallylarge.
＊ Motor could not be accelerated
by full voltage starting (V / fcontrol).
＊ The motor with a phaseadvance capacitor is used.
＊ Current control gain is
unsuitable (vector control).
＊ The setting value of FCL
operation level is unsuitable.
＊ Setting value of auto-tuning is
unsuitable.
＊ Combination of inverter andmotor is incorrect.
＊ An erroneous operation of
speed detection (control withsensor).

＊ Elongate the acceleration anddeceleration times.
＊ Mitigation of load.
Revision of an inverter andmotor capacities.
＊ Stop full voltage starting andchange to ordinary starteng.
＊ Remove phase advancecapacitor.
＊ Adjust current control gain (E12〜14).
＊ Revision of the setting value of
FCL level (F-04).
＊ Carry out full mode auto-tuning
again.
＊ Make combination of inverter
and motor correctly.
＊ The check of PG wiring
route,separation from the main
circuit wiring.

oc

101

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

Overheating ofheat sink for IGBT
module in a unit
and input
rectification diodemodules.

＊ Trouble of the fan motor forcooling.
＊ Ambient temperature is high.
＊ The cooling space of a unit is
not enough.
＊ The direction of installation of aunit is unsuitable.
＊ DCL was not connected.
＊ Carrier frequency was set
beyond initial value.
＊ Operation of the temperaturedetection sensor for cooling finsis poor.

＊ Exchange of the fan motor forcooling.
＊ A check of installation
environment, a check of thetemperature rise in a control
board.
＊ Secure sufficient cooling space.
＊ Make correct installation.
＊ Connect DCL.
＊ Set carrier frequency (A-10)
below the initial value, or reduceload capacity.
＊ The conduction check of acooling fin temperature sensor(Non-conduction is normal when
fin temperature is low).

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

oH

7522˜
18022
7544˜
100044oV

AllmodelsIntermediate DCpart of a unit
(master unit incase of parallel
units) over voltage
protection(Operates by DC
voltage of about400(200V series)/
800V(400V
series)).

＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of
the output wiring cable.
＊ Deceleration time is too short.
＊ Erroneous setting of built-in DB
operation voltage＊ The erroneous operation of a
dynamic brake option.
＊ An unusual rise of input power
supply voltage.
＊ The inertia of load is large.

＊ The check of output wiring.
＊ Elongate decel. time or use
regeneration stall preventionfunction (b-13). Or connect DB
option.
＊ Adjustment of built-in DB
operation voltage (F-00).
＊ Exchange a dynamic brake
option.
＊ Confirm input power supply
voltage.
＊ Use a regeneration converter ordynamic brake option.

iGbt

1R122˜
2222
1R144˜
2244

IPM module
protective
operation in a unit
(IGBT element
over-current, IGBT
gate power supply
voltage down.
overheating of fin
for IPM module,
input rectification
diode module)＊ IGBT(IPM) was damaged by a

＊ Check the conduction of IGBT

certain cause.
＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of
the output wiring cable.
＊ Trouble of the fan motor forcooling.
＊ Ambient temperature is high.
＊ The cooling space of a unit is
not enough.
＊ The direction of installation of aunit is unsuitable.
＊ DCL was not attached even inmodel, to which DCL is attachedas the standard accessory.
＊ Set carrier frequency at higher
value than initial one.
＊ Continued the operation atlower frequency than10Hz.
＊ Operation of the P.C. Board
GAC64 and MAC64 is poor.

(IPM).
＊ The check of output wiring.
＊ Exchange of the fan motor forOHcooling.
＊ A check of installation
environment, a check of thetemperature rise in a control
board.
＊ Secure sufficient cooling space.
＊ Make correct installation.
＊ Connect DCL.
＊ Set carrier frequency (A-10) at
lower value than initial one, or
reduce load capacity.
＊ Reduce capacity accoriding to
the capacity reduction curve at
the time of low frequency
operation.
＊ Exchange of GAC64 or MAC64
P.C.board.

102

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

OGU

Over-current
protection of U
phase IGBT
module in a unit,
or output overcurrent protection.

OCV

Over-current
protection of V
phase IGBT
module in a unit,
or output overcurrent protection.

OCW

Over-current
protection of W
phase IGBT
module in a unit,
or output overcurrent protection.

＊ IGBT (IPM) was damaged by aceratin cause.
＊ Ground-faukt or short-circuit of
the output wiring cable.
＊ Setting value of auto-tuning is
unsuitable.
＊ Acceleration and deceleration
times are too short (V / fcontrol).
＊ Load capacity is unusuallylarge.
＊ Motor could not be accelerated
by full-voltage starting (V / fcontrol)＊ Motor with phase advancecondenser is used.
＊ Continued the operation atlower frequency than 10Hz.

＊ Check the conducyion of IGBT
(IPM).
＊ The check of output wiring.
＊ Carry-out the full mode autotuning.
＊ Revision of scceleration anddeceleration times.
＊ Mitigation of load.
Revision of inverter and motor
capacities.
＊ Instead of full-voltage starting,make ordinary starting.
＊ Remove phase advancecondenser.
＊ Reduce caoacity according to
the capacity reduction curve at
the time of low frequency
operation.

UV-G

IGBT gate power
supply voltage in aunit is abnormal(Liphase N side is
detected)＊ Operation of GAC2001 P.C.
board is poor.

＊ Exchange of GAC2001 P.C.
board.

Protection
operates, whenabout 290%
current of inverter
rating flows
continuously forabout 2 seconds
or more to amaster unit or aslave unit output.

＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of＊ The check of output wiring.

the output wiring cable.
＊ Accel/decel time are too short(V / f control)＊ Load capacity is unusuallylarge.
＊ Motor could not be accelerated
by full-voltage starting (V / fcontrol)＊ Motor with phase advancecondenser is used.
＊ Current control gain is
unsuitable (vector control)＊ The setting value of FCL
operation level is unsuitable.
＊ An erroneous operation of
speed detection (control withsensor).

＊ Elongate accel/decel times.
＊ Reduse the load,Revise
capacity of Inverter-motor.
＊ Instead of full-voltage starting,make ordinary starting.
＊ Remove phase advancecondenser.
＊ Adjust current control gain (E12〜14).
＊ Revise FCL level (F-04) setting
value.
＊The check of PG wiring route,separation from the main circuit
wiring.

Protective (IGBT
operation element
overcurrent,of U
phase IPM IGBTgate
module in powersag.
a unit.
Protective Ovenheat
operation of gin for
IPM・inputof V
phase IPM rectigication
module in diade
modulea unit.
Protective trauble ofoperation gin motor
forof W
phase IPM ventilation
module in of insideof a unit.
a unit.

＊ U,V,W phases of IGBT (IPM)
were damaged by a certain
cause.
＊ Ground-fault or short-circuit of
the output wiring cable.
＊ Trouble of the fan motor forcooling.
＊ Ambient temperature is high.
＊ The cooling space of a unit is
not enough.
＊ The direction of installation of aunit is unsuitable.
＊ DCL was not connected.
＊ Carrier frequency was set at
higher value than initial one.
＊ Continued operation at lower
frequency than 10Hz.
＊ Operation of the P.C. boards
GAC64 is poor.

＊ The conduction check of IGBT
(IPM).
＊ The check of output wiring.
＊ Exchange of Fan Motor for
Cooling.
＊ A chek of installation
environment, a check of thetemperature rise in a control
board.
＊ Secure sufficient cooling space.
＊ Make correct installation.
＊ Connect DCL.
＊ Set carrier frequency (A-10) at
lower value than initial one , or
reduce load capacity.
＊ Reduce capacity according to
the capacity reduction curve at
the time of low frequency
operation.
＊ Exchange of GAC64 P.C.
board.

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

iGbt

7522˜
18022
7544˜
10004415022˜
18022
40044˜
100044

iGt1

iGt2

iGt3

103

3022˜
5522
3044˜
5544

FCLOC

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

Protection
operates when
Inverter does notwork even though
10 seconds
passed after
inputting or
operation and jog
commands.
The abnormal
operation or poorconnection of adigital option P.C.
board.

＊ Inputted the operation and jog
commands for more than 10
seconds sfter detection ofunder-voltage (power failure).
＊ Inputted the operation and jog
commands for more than 10
seconds during input ofemergency stop signal.

＊ Turu the instantaneous power
failure re-starting selection (B11) to on.
＊ Sequence should be that
operation and jpg commands
are turned to off at the time ofan emergency stop signal input.

＊ In spite of no use of digital
option P.C.
Board,selected the use of digital
option (J-00).
＊ Operation of a digital option
P.C. board is poor.
＊ The digital option P.C.board is
not surely connected.

＊ Turn digital option use selection(J-00) to OFF.
＊ Exchange of a digital option
P.C. board.
＊ Check the connection with adigital option P.C. boarf and thestate of the insertion of aconnector.

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

StrF

All
modelsoPEr

AllmodelscS2

AllmodelsEEPROM datasum check error of
VFC2001 P.C.
board.

＊ VFC2001 P.C. board of no
initialozing was mounted.
＊ Erroneous writing to EEPROM
by the excessive noise.
＊ The defect of EEPROM parts.

＊ Initialize the VFC2001 P.C.
board.
＊ Take countermeasure against
noise to wring from VFC2001.
＊ Exchange of VFC2001 P.C.
board.
(Once console indication isturned to cS2. it cannot bereleased unless VFC2001 is
initiallzed.)

ccEr1

All
modelsThe
communication
timeout error
between VFC2001
P.C. board˜
console panel(SET64).

＊ Disconnection of a console
panel connection cable andpoor insertion of a connector.
＊ VFC2001 P.C. board is in the
program rewriting mode.
＊ Mal-operation of VFC2001 P.C.
board.

＊ An insertion check of aconnector. Exchange of aconnection cable.
＊ Confirm that SW 3 and SW4 of
VFC2001 P.C. board are OFF.
＊ Exchange of VFC2001 P.C.
board.

ccEr2

All
models＊ The excessive noise invaded
into the extension cable,
connected with console panel(SET64).
＊ Mal-operation of VFC2001 P.C.
board.

＊ Take countermeasure against
noise to the extension cable,
connected with console panel(SET64).
＊ Exchange of VFC2001
P.C.board.

ccEr3

All
modelsThe
communication
sum check error
between VFC2001
P.C. board˜
console panel.
There was an error
in thecommunication
data which
VFC2001 P.C.
board received.

＊ Disconnection of a console
panel (SET64) connection cableand poor insertion of aconnector.
＊ Two console panels (SET64)
were connected to theconnector for SET64
simultaneously.

＊ An insertion check of aconnector.Exchange of aconnection cable.
＊ To the connector for
SET64,only one cosole panel
SET64 should be connected.

tS

AllmodelsThe
communication
timeout error
between digital
option P.C. board˜communication
master office.

＊ Operation of a communication
master office is poor.
＊ Disconnection of connection
cable between digital option
P.C. board〜
communication master office.
Poor insertion of a connector.

＊ The check of operation of acommunication master office.
＊ The check of insertion of aconnector.Exchange of
connection cable.

SLF

15022˜
18022
40044˜
100044

Overheat of heatsink for IGBT
modulein slave unit.
Overheat of heatsink for input
converter at slaveside.

＊ Trouble of fan motor for coolingof slave unit.
＊ Ambient temperature is high.
＊ Cooling space of unit isinsufficient.
＊ Direction of installation of unit isunsuitable.
＊ Set carrier frequency at higher
than initial value.
＊ DCL is not connected.
＊ Mal-function of temperaturedetection sensor of cooling fin.

＊ Replace fan motor for cooling.
＊ Confirm installation environment
and temperature increase of
inside of control panel.
＊ Secure sufficient cooling space.
＊ Install correctly.
＊ Set carrier frequency (A-10) at
lower than initial value or
reduce load capacity.
＊ Connect DCL.
＊ Conduction check oftemperature sensor of coolingfin (When fin temperature islow, non-condrction is normal).

OH

104

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

Over voltage
protection at intermediate DC part ofslave unit
(operates when
DC voltage isabout 400V(200V
series) /800V(400V series)＊ Earthing or shortcircuit of output
wiring cable.
＊ Deceleration time is too short.
＊ Malfunction of DB option.
＊ Extra-ordinary increase of input
power source voltage.
＊ Load inertia is large.

＊ Check output wiring.
＊ Elongate deceleration time or

Overcurrent
protection of Uphase IGBT
module in slave
unit or output
overcurrent
protection.

＊ IGBT (IPM) broke.
＊ Earthing or shortcircuit of output＊ Conduction check of IGBT
(IPM).
＊ Creck output wiring.
＊ Execute full mode auto-tuning.
＊ Revise accel/decel times.
＊ Reduce the load and revise
capacity of Inverter motor.
＊ Stop full voltage starting andchange to ordinary starting.
＊ Remove phase-advancecondenser.
＊ Reduce capacity in accordancewith capacity reduction curve at
the time of operation by low
frequency.

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

SLF

15022˜
18022
40044˜
100044

OV-S

OCU

PSCF

SPdE

105

All
models(Only
vectorcontrolmode)wiring cable.
＊ Setting value of auto-tuning is
unsuitable.
＊ Accel/decel times are too short(V / f control)＊ Load capacity is extra-ordinarily
large.
＊ Motor could not be accelerated
by full-voltage
starting (V / f control).
＊ Motor with phase-advancecondenser is used.
＊ Executed continuous operation
by low frequency of less than10Hz.

use preventive function (b-13)
of regeneration stall. Or,connect
DB option.
＊ Replace DB option.
＊ Confirm input power source
voltage.
＊ Use regeneration converter or
DB option.

OCV

Overcurrent
protection of Vphase IGBT
module in slave
unit or output
overcurrent
protection.

OCW

Overcurrent
protection of Wphase IGBT
module in slave
unit or output
overcurrent
protection.

UV-G

Abnomal voltageof IGBTgate power sourcein slave unit
(Detect N-side of
U-phase).

＊ Malfunction of GAC2001
P.C.board.

＊ Replace GAC2001 P.C.board.

OV-S

Abnomal voltage
of GAC2001
control powersource in slave
unit
Voltage loweringof PRIM61.
PRIS61 control
power source or
dis-connection of
power source
supply line.

＊ Mal-function of GAC2001
P.C.board.

＊ Replace GAC2001 P.C.board.

＊ Disconnection of connection
cable between master unit andslave unit.
Erroneous insertion ofconnector.
＊ Mal-function of PRIM61
P.C.board.

＊ Confirm insertion ofconnector,Replace connection
cable.
＊ Replace PRIM61 P.C.board.

Protection
operates, when
the deviation of
speed command
value from motor
speed comes off
the speed range of
speed control error
detection.

＊ The setting value of detection
speed rabge is unsuitable.
＊ Since load was large,torquerestriction function startde.
＊ Since accel/decel times wereshort,torgue restriction function
started.
＊ Operation of an external speed
setter is poor.
(Following items are in case ofcontrol with sensor only)＊ Disconnection of PG
line,operation of PG is poor.
＊ Erroneous connection of PG.
＊ Erroneous connection between
lnverter output terminal andmotor.

＊ Set the suitable value fordetection speed range (F-09〜
10).
＊ Reduce the load.
＊ Elongate acceleration/deceleration times.
＊ Operation check of an external
speed setter.
＊ A check of PG line, exchange of
PG.
＊ Confirm connection line
between PG and VFC2001 P.C.
board.
＊ Confirm connection line
between inverter and motor.

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

The external
failure 1 of amultifunction input
was inputted.

＊ The external failure signal was
inputted.
＊ Setting of multifunction input is
unsuitable.

＊ Check the input conditions of an＊ external failure signal.

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

EF1

All
modelsCheck the conditions of thesetting of a multifunction input(C00˜06).

EF2

All
models

The external
failure 2 of amultifunction input
was inputted.

EF3

All
models

The external
failure 3 of amultifunction input
was inputted.

EF4

All
models

The external
failure 4 of amultifunction input
was inputted.

oSAllmodels(Only
vectorcontrolmode)

Protection
operates, whenmotor speed
exceeds the overspeed setting (F01, F-02).

＊ Operation of an external speed
setter is poor.
＊ The overshoots by poor
adjustment of a speed control
system gain.
＊ Load is smaller than torquecommand value at the time of
the torque control mode.
＊ The setting value of overspeed
setting is unsuitable.
＊ An erroneous operation caused
by noise of speed detection .
＊ The setting value of the numberof PG pulse is unsuitable(only incase of vector control mode withsensor).

＊ Check the operation of an
external speed setter.
＊ Re-adjustment of a speed
control system gain(7. ASRP, 8.
ASri, 9. ASrJ).
＊ Revision of torque command
value.
＊ Revision of the setting value ofoverspeed setting(F-01˜02).
＊ The check of PG wiring route,separation from the main circuit
wiring.
＊ Revise the setting value of thenumber (A-09) of PG pulse.

oFAll
models(Only
vectorcontrol
mode)

Operates when
Inverter output
frequency exceeds
overfrequency
setting (F-01, F02).

＊ Mal-function of externalfrequency setter.
＊ Setting value of overfrequency
setting is unsuitable.

＊ Confirm operation of externalfrequency setter.
＊ Revise setting value of
overfrequency setting(F-01 ˜ F-02)

ot

All
models(Only
vectorcontrol
mode)

When torquecommand exceeds
105%, counting
starts and when it
reaches 150% for
1 minute orequivalent,protection
operates.

＊ Mal-function of external torguecommand setter.
＊ Setting values of relatives ofover torque protection function
are unsuitable.
＊ Load capacity is unusuallylarge.

＊ Operation check of an external
torque command setter.
＊ Revision of setting of relativesof over torque protection
function (F-05˜07).
＊ Mitigation of load.
Revision of inverter and motor
capacities.

inoH

All
modelsWhen the motor
temperaturedetection option isequipped if motor
temperature
exceeds 150℃,
protection
operates.

＊ Trouble of cooling fan motor ofa motor.
＊ The ambient temperature of a
motor is high.
＊ Disconnection of wiring of motor
temperature detection invasionof a noise.
＊ Unsuitable adjustment of motor
temperature detection gain, etc.

＊ The check of cooling fan motorof amotor.
＊ The check of installation
environment of a motor.
＊ The check of motor temperaturedetection wiring
countermeasure for noise.
＊ Re-adjustment of motor
temperature detection gain (G19, 20).

106

8

SET64
LED
Dispiay

Model

Protection display LED on P.C .board
In single unit
In slave unit ofand master unit
parallelof parallel
connection
connection

The contents ofprotective
operation

The main factors which carried out
protective operation

The main check points andcountermeasure

PRIM61 GAC2001 PRIS61 GAC2001

SEt0

All
modelsIn the status thatsettings of valuesof motor ratingplate and of carrier
frequency are
unsuitable,
operation / jog
command or autotuning startcommand was
inputted.

＊ Setting value of inverter
capacity of the plate is different
from that of actual inverter unit.
＊ The setting of values of motor
rating plate and of carrier
frequency are unsuitable.
＊ Although use of the 2nd motor
was selected, values of the 2nd
motor rating plate have notbeen set.
＊ Auto-tuning was not carried out
sfter changing of carrier
frequency.

＊ Reset from memory initializing
and coincide setting value of
inverter capacity with that ofinverter unit.
＊ Set the values of motor ratingplate (A-02〜07) and carrier
frequency (A-10) corre-city,andcarry out auto-tuning.
＊ Set the values of plate (L-01〜06) of the 2nd motor correctly
and carryout auto-tuning.
＊ After chanfe of carrier frequency(A-10), surely carry out sutotuning.

SEt1

All
modelsIn the status thatsettings of PG
pulse vector
control and of
relatives of current
control are
unsuitables,
operation / jog
command was
inputted.

＊ The setting value of the numberof PG pulse is unsuitable (onlyin case of vector control modewith speed sensor).
＊ Setting of relatives of current
control gain is unsuitable.
＊ Auto-tuning has not been
carrted out or auto-tuning was
not performed correctly.

＊ Revision of setting value of thenumber of PG pulus (A-09).
＊ Revision of setting of current
control gain (E-12〜14).
＊ Carry out auto-tuning (Whenuse of the 2nd motor ischosen,carry out suto-tuning
also of the 2nd motor).

SEt2

All
modelsOperation / jog
command was
inputted in thestate that settingof relatives of
speed exceeded
setting possible
range.

＊ Absolute value of settings ofoverspeed/overfrequency (F01,F-02) exceeded 1.5 times ofthe maximum speed/frequency(A-00).
＊ Setting values related to speed
and frequency exceeded themax.
frequency (A-00).

＊ Revision of setting values
related to overspeed and overfrequency (F-01,F-02).
＊ Revise setting values related to
speed/frequency.
(If setting values arecorrect,reset lnverter from initia
lizing of VFC2001 P.C. board).

SEt3

All
modelsOperation / jog
command was
inputted when
analog input /output gain setting
is incorrect.

＊ Setting of relatives of analog
input / output gain is unsuitable.

＊ Revirsion of setting values
related to analog input / output
gain (G-00〜20)(If setting values arecorrect,reset inverter frominitialiging of VFC2001 P.C/
board).

uVclass200V
all models

Intermediate DCpart voltage of theunit dropped toabout 180V or lessduring operation.

＊ The input power supply
interrupted during operation(instant electric power failure).
＊ Open phase of an input power
supply.

＊ Confirm an input power supply.
＊ Turn to ON the selection of
re-start function at instaneous
power failure (b-11).

class400V
all models

Intermediate DCpart voltage of theunit dropped toabout 360V or lessduring operation.

Allmodels

Display only when
the input contact
of an emergency
stop is ON .

EnGon

107

(EnGon is not a protection
display)ー8

2. Periodical inspection
In order to keep always the Inverter in best condition and to make it deliver excellent performance fully, execute periodical
inspection once a half year at least and at that time, inspect enough the points which are not inspected in daily visual
operation check.
Maintenance inspection is to be executed by persons having safety knowledge on electricity.

CAUTION [as to inspection work]
Don't open the cover during input power is supplied.
There is a fear of electric shock● Make inspection after turning the power source of Inverter to OFF and going off of LED for confirmation of [CHG]on main circuit P.C.Board.
When cover of Inverter is opened, LED can be confirmed on P.C.Board.
There is a fear of electric shock
There is a fear of injury● There may be a case that temperature of heat sink rises higher than that of use conditions, for which please pay
attention.
There is a fear of burn●

DANGER [as to maintenance, inspection, replacement of parts]
Make inspection after passing of 10 minutes or more from turning off of input power source. Also, check DC voltage
between [ + 2 and - ] and confirm that it is less than 30V.
There is a fear of electric shock● Maintenance, inspection and exchange of parts should be done by designated persons only.
[Remove worn metallic materials (watch, bracelet) before these works.](Surely use insulated tools at the time of these works.)
There is a fear of electric shock and injury●○○

Table of items of periodical inspection
Inspection item, object

Content of inspection

External appearance of the unit

Check whether vent and heatsink are choked with dust.If they are choked, clean them.

Cooling fan

If dust adhered to cooling fan, clean it. Replace the fan making its life (about 30,000 hours)
as a criterion.

Inside of the unit

Check whether dust adhered to P.C.Board and other electronic parts. If adhered, clean them.

Terminal block， terminal screw

Check whether terminal block and fitting screws became loose.If looseness is found, make increased tightening.

Connector

Check whether connectors and terminals of control P.C.Board became loose.

WiringCheck whether defects such as crack and deformation, etc. are found on insulation coating of wiring.

Electrolytic condenser

Replace if defects such as leak and discoloration of eletrolyte are found. Criterion of replacing time ofcondenser is 5 years under condition of 12 hours use per day, with ambient average temperature of less than 35℃.

CAUTION [as to condenser]●

In case of use of spare Inverter, of which storing period is more than 3 years, impress rated AC input voltage to
Inverter for about 8 hours in the status of disconnecting the output wire of Inverter since electrolytic condenser
is mounted in the Inverter. After this aging work of condenser, use Inverter.
If such condenser is used without aging, it could result in breakage of condenser and dangerous situation.

108

8

3. Insulation resistance test
(1) Clean each part and make insulation resistance test by DC 500V Megger. For Megger test, remove all wirings onceand shortcircuit between terminal blocks of main circuit as per Fig. below.
(Don't make Megger Test of control circuit)
VF64 main circuit terminal blockMR
MT

Shortcircuit between each terminals
Megger(for DC500V)(Note) MR and MT terminal is incorporated in inverters only of 11kW and more.

(2) After completion of preparation, measure insulation resistance between terminal of main circuit terminal block TB1 andearth terminal ( ).
(3) Remove all shortcircuit wires after testing.

4. Disposal
When disposing of replaced parts and maintenance parts, execute it conforming to the local

regulations.

5. Compatibility with old models
In VF64, some parts are not compatible between new and old models as shown in the table below (this Manual explainsbased on the new model).
In case of repair at the time of trouble and placing order of spare parts, customer is requested to inform us whether
relevant Inverter unit is new or old model.

5-1. How to distinguish the new/old models
New/old models can be distinguished from the application
mark (APPL.) of model column of the unit. In case thatapplication mark (APPL.) is less QA19, unit is old model andover QA21, unit is new model.
Application mark can be confirmed from the description of
console panel (SET64) fitting board, opening the front cover ofthe unit. (See the drawing at right side)(In case of new model, application mark is shown in the labelof front cover.)Less 19 : old model
Less 21 : new modelPart of SET64 fitting board

5-2. Compatibility of new - old models
New and old models are same as the function of the unit and have perfect compatibility however, a part of spare P.C.
board, etc.have not compatibility owing to model change of P.C. board etc. of the inside of the unit.
We explain the changing points of P.C.board from old models to new models of each type, capacity and also thecompatibility of combination of new/old models and each P.C. board an follows.
Option P.C.boards (RSH64, 1064, etc.)of other than under-mentioned board have no difference in new - old models.

109

8

(1) 1.1〜55kW (VF64 1R122〜5522,
VF64-1R144 〜 5544.)〈Changing points from old models to new models〉
・Controrl P.C.board was changed to VFC2001 and main circuit P.C.board was changed to MAC64 (1.1〜7.5kW) andgate P.C.board was changed to GAC64 (11〜55kW) respectively.
・Terminal block P.C.board (VFC64TB) was minor model-changed (application mark QA3→QB3).
As this minor change is for the units of 75kW or over, there is a case that conventional P.C.board is mounted in this capacity.
〈Table of compatibility〉
P.C.board nameControl P.C.board
Terminal block
P.C.board
Main circuit P.C.board
Gate P.C.board

New model product Old model product(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application (a part) Standard application(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)

Remark(2) 75〜160kW (400V series) (VF64-7544〜16044)〈Changing points from old models to new models〉
・Controrl P.C.board was changed to VFC2001 and Gate P.C.board was changed to GAC2001 respectively.
・Terminal block P.C.board (VFC64TB) was minor model-changed (application mark QA3→QB3).
・By adoption of GAC2001, internal structure of the unit was changed.
〈Table of compatibility〉
P.C.board nameControl P.C.board
Terminal block
P.C.board
Gate P.C.board

New model product Old model productStandard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application

Remark(3) 75〜180kW (200V series), 200〜1000kW (400V series) (VF64-7522〜18022, VF64-20044〜100044)〈Changing points from old models to new models〉
・Controrl P.C.board was changed to VFC2001 and Gate P.C.board was changed to GAC2001 respectively.
・Terminal block P.C.board (VFC64TB) was minor model-changed (application mark QA3→QB3).
・By adoption of GAC2001, internal structure of the unit was changed.
〈Table of compatibility〉
P.C.board nameControl P.C.board
Terminal block
P.C.board
Gate P.C.board

Power source
P.C.board
Parallel P.C.board(parallel units only)

New model product Old model productRemark(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)(Unusable)
Standard application
Standard application(Unusable)
For VF64-20044 or over. 3 boards(Unusable)
Standard application
were used in old model but 1Standard application board in case of GAC2001.
(Unusable)
In new model. power
Standard application
Standard application For slave unit side is supplied from
GAC2001.
of parallel use.
Standard application Standard application Master unit side of parallel use.
Standard application Standard application Slave unit side of parallel use.
(Unnecessary)(Unnecessary)

110

8

5-3. Changing points of each P.C.board
Table below shows the changing points of each P.C.board
New P.C.board

Old P.C.board

Changing points

Control P.C.board

・Added connector for connection to new Gate P.C.board (GAC2001)
・Added LED for confirmation of CPU operation.
・Added U, V, W input terminals of PG (these are unusable in VF64)

Terminal block
P.C.board・Added stability circuit which is necessary when power is
supplied from power source GAC2001.

Gate P.C.board

・Made common to all types of 75kW or over.
・Unified the function of power source P.C.boards (PSM61, PSS61).
・Unified the content of 3 phases in the models of more than 200kW (old model needs 3 boards)
・Deletion of circuit used in old type (VF61). (Unnecessary in VF64)
・Deletion of circuit used in old type (VF61). (Unnecessary in VF64)

Main circuit P.C.board

111

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

Chapter 9 Standard specifications
1.Common specifications
Common specifications of 3 kinds of control system [Speed sensorless vector control], [Vector control with speed sensor] and [V/f control] areas shown below. By utilizing of under-mentioned performance and function, the most suitable control system for application can be selected.
Performance/Function
Power source rating

Speed sensorless vector control

Vector control with speed sensor ＊1

V/f control

200V class: 200〜230V, 50/60Hz 400V class: 380V〜460V, 50/60HzPower source fluctuation

Voltage: ±10% Frequency: ±5%

Control system

Hybrid type vector control system

Frequency-Voltage control system(Equivalent sine wave voltage type PWM)
V/f pattern: Selective from3 kinds of

Sensorless high speed,

High speed・high accuracy,

speed・torque control

speed・torque control with sensor ・Straight V/f constant (with auto.boost
function)・square reduction・Bend line.

Max. speed/frequency

Until 245Hz or equivalent

400Hz

1〜15kHz

1〜15kHz

Types of 3722, 3744 or less: Reduction of capacity is required at 9kHz or over

Types of 4522,4544 or over: Reduction

Types of 4522, 4544 or over: Reduction of capacity is required at 6kHz or overof capacity is required at 10kHz or over.

Carrier frequency

95% or more (at the time of rated output)

Inverter efficiency
Overload capacity
Speed control range

150% current 1 min.
1:150(TOYO Inv.motor)

1:1000(TOYO Inverter motor)

About 1:10

1:75(general purpose motor)
Speed accuracy /Digital input:±0.5%

Digital input:±0.01%

Digital input: ±0.01%

Frequency accuracy

Analog input: ±0.5%

Analog input: ±0.2%

Analog input: ±0.2%(Speed depends on slip amount of motor)

Speed control system

MFC control & PI control

MFC control & PI control(Speed operation feedback control)(PG speed feedback control)

Speed control response

200rad/s(-3dB)

400rad／s（-3dB）

Torque control accuracy±5%(TOYO Inv. motor)±3%(TOYO Inv. motor)±8％(general purpose motor)＊3
Torque control response
Power constant range ＊4
Zero speed control

2krad／s（-3dB）
1:4(TOYO Inv. motor)

1:4(TOYO Inv. motor)

Unavailable

Available

Starting torque
Torque limit＊2
2krad／s（-3dB）＊5150% or more

150％

For. run powering, For. run regeneration,

Powering, RegenerationRev. run powering, Rev. run regeneration

Setting range:0〜150% each ＊6

Setting range: 0〜150% each (Possible to set until 200% by combination
with motor)
Accel/decel time

0.1〜3600sec.(Possible to changeover 4 kinds of setting from terminal block and 2 kinds of them are S pattern accel/decel time)

S pattern accel/decel time 0〜60sec. (Possible to changeover 2 kinds of setting from terminal block)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N

Programed operation

Possible to set max. 8 points (Time unit: possible to changeover hour, minute, second. Range: 0.0〜3600.0)

Rotation direction

For. run and rev. run are possible (Possible to select inhibition of counter direction against command)

Dynamic braking(DB)Types of 1122 (200V class), 1544 (400V class) or less incorporate dynamic brake circuit.
(Brake resistor, thermal relaly are Option and of external mounting)Droop control

Possible (Setting function of droop ratio, droop starting torque, etc. is available)

Drive of 2nd motor

Possible to drive two motors alternately.

Stop mode

Possible to select decel. stop/ DC brake after decel. stop/ Free stop.

Initial excitation

Possible to select by multifunction input.

DC braking

At decel. stop : 0〜10sec.

At decel. stop: 0〜10sec.

20〜500% of rated excitation current

Voltage: 0〜20%

Min. rotation speed〜300min-1

Min. frequency〜30Hz

Jog drive−112

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

Performance/Function
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N

Speed sensorless vector control

Vector control with speed sensor ＊1

Jump function

Possible to make 4 kinds of speed jump setting.

Highly efficient drive

Possible to select automatic flux adjustment drive at light load.

Boost
Instability suppression function
Control terminal block input

V/f control
Possible to make 4 kinds of frequency jump setting.
−−Select manual boost, auto. boost.

−With stabilization adjustment function.

Possible to changeover sink mode / source mode.

I
N
P
U
T

Speed/frequency command Terminal block: DC 0〜10V or ±10V or 4〜20mA input non-isolated.

O
U
T
P
U
T

Analog voltage output

DC 10V output voltage: Output current/ Motor speed (output frequency)/Speed command (frequency command), etc.

Contact output (2)Operate by drive: Operate by protective functions en bloc.

Multifunction input

Preset speed command (7), Accel/decel time selection (4 kinds),Accel/decel drive by contact,Hold of speed.Inhibition of(contact input)

S pattern accel/decel, Droop control inactive, Reverse run command, DC brake command, External failure signal (4),

S
I
G
N
A
L

Drive signal

For. run, Rev. run, Jog for. run, Jog rev. run, Emergency stop, Reset.

Speed detection signal

Speed detector(PG) (Standard 600P/R DC12 V A-phase B-phase : to be used at the time of vector control with sensor only)

Output for speed/frequency meter

PWM pulse of 6 times of output frequency (Possible to connect analog meter). Rotation speed output (frequency conversion) at vector control

Trace back external trigger, Second motor selection, Emergency stop B contact, Programed drive advance, Speedcommand terminal block selection, Initial excitation・Speed/torque control changeover (Vector control only), etc.
Multifunction output

Speed (frequency) detection (2), Setting-reach, Torque detection (2 of "with polarity" and "absolute value"), During(Open collector output)

power failure, Load pre-alarm, During retry, During rev. run, Protective operation code, Sum check abnormal.

HC function

Addition/subtraction, Multiplication, Comparator, First order lag, Dead band, PI Amplifier,Feedforward,Cancelation (Modern control), Diode preference, Simple accel/decel, S pattern accel/decel,
Data selector, Hysteresis non-linear, Pattern generator, 1 bit selection of data, etc.

Sequence function

Make sequence of drive・stop and multifunction input/output conforming to the application.

(PLC function)

Input: Terminal block 10 contacts (By communication, input from upper CPU is also possible).
Output: Open collector 4, Contact output 2 (1a・1c) (By communication, output to upper CPU is also possible)
Kind of internal relays: Master control relay 1,

Trace back function

Control relay IN 128,

Control relay OUT 128,Internal relay 30,

Latch relay 10,

ON differentiation relay 10,

OFF differentiation relay 10,

ON delay timer 10,

OFF delay timer 10.

Possible to memorize digital 12ch + [status of drive・protection] X 100 points for past 2 times.

Memorycontent: Memorize Output current, Output voltage, Torque command, Output of each super block, etc.
1 point trace back function

Records the history of past 5 protective operation and 6 points data of output current, output voltage, torque command, etc. at the time of protective operation.

Console panel

Indicator : 7 segments, 5 digits LED display.
Display:

Status of drive / Data monitor / Function Setting data / Protective operation / Protection history.

Unit indication: LED 4
Protective function

Indication of status: LED 6

Operation: Touch key 8

Output overcurrent, Output overload (electronic thermal), DC part over voltage, Fin overheat, IGBT power source abnormal, Memory
abnormal, Earth fault, Overspeed (over-frequency), Option abnormal, Start stall, External failure, Under voltage, Communication
abnormal, Over torque (Vector control mode only), Speed control error (Vector control mode only), Motor overheat (Option), etc.

Safety indication

LED goes on while charging.

Protective structure (JEM1030)

IP00 (open type)

Ambient environment

Operation temperature : 0〜50℃

Humidity : 20〜90%RH ( No condensation)

Altitude : 1000m or less

Storage temperature : -20〜60℃

Atmosphere : To be no harmful gas, metal powder, oil, etc.
2

Vibration : 5.9m/S (0.6G or less 10〜55Hz), conforming to JIS C0040＊1. Shows specifications in case of use combined with TOYO Inverter motor.
＊2. If requested, we show guarantee values in case of adjustment in our factory.
＊3. Range of powering side only in case of speed sensorless vector control. Special motor is not included.
＊4. In case of use in the range of power constant, please contact us.
＊5. As speed varies depending on drive condition, carrier frequency, etc. in case of continuous drive, please contact us.
＊6. In V/f control system, torque is limited when lowering of frequency and accel/decel time.
If high accuracy is required, use speed sensorless vector control or vector control with speed sensor.

☆In case of delivery of VF64 Inverter as standard type and alone, factory set of control system is [V/f control system].

113

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

2. Table of types●Capacity range of VF64 Inverters.
200V class : 1.1〜180kW
400V class : 1.1〜 1000kW●●●Type-selection of Inverters by motor rated voltage is shown below.
●

200V class : Type-selection by motor rated voltage of 200V and 180V.

●

400V class : Type-selection by motor rated voltage of 400V and 360V.

In case of use of Inverter by vector control with speed sensor, use it making
motor rated voltage at 90% or less of source voltage. (When motor rated
voltage and source voltage are equal, control characteristics may lower at
90% or more of rated speed.)
VF64 Inverter. 7.5kW 200V

●Table of Type-selection
Motor capacity (kW)

Motor capacity (kW)200V class
VF64 Type

400V class
VF64 Type

Motor rated voltage

Motor rated voltage
400V

360V

VF64-1R144

1.1

＊1.1

1.5

VF64-2R244

2.2

＊2.2

3.7

2.2

VF64-3R744

3.7（4.0）＊3.7

VF64-5R522

5.5

3.7

VF64-5R544

5.5—

VF64-7R522

7.5

5.5

VF64-7R544

7.5

5.5

VF64-1122

11

7.5

VF64-1144

11

7.5

VF64-1522

15

11

VF64-1544

1511

VF64-2222

22

18.5

VF64-2244

22

18.5

VF64-3022

30

22VF64-3044

30

22VF64-3722

3730

VF64-3744

3730

VF64-4522

4537

VF64-4544

4537

VF64-5522

55

45

VF64-5544

5545

VF64-7522

75

55

VF64-7544

75

55

VF64-9022

9075

VF64-11044

110

90

★

VF64-15022

150

132

VF64-16044

160

132

★

VF64-18022

180

160

VF64-20044

200

160（180）

VF64-25044

250

200（220）

VF64-31544

315

280

★

VF64-40044

400

355

★

VF64-50044

500

450

★

VF64-60044

600

530

★

VF64-75044

750

670

★

VF64-100044

1000

900

200V

180V

VF64-1R122

1.1

＊1.1

VF64-2R222

2.2

VF64-3R722(Note 1) Types with★mark use Inverter units parallelly.
(Note 2) Types with＊mark need not capacity deratingeven in case of reduced voltage.
(Note 3) Motor capacity in ( ) is usable if motor current iswithin the rated current of inverter.

114

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

3. Table of capacities
3-1. Motor rated voltage is 200V・400V
200V class

Type
VF64-

1122

1522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

Applicable motor capacity(kW) *1

1R122 2R222 3R722 5R522 7R522
1.1

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

Rated output current (A)

5.5

10.0

17.0

24.0

32.5

46.0

62.5

87.0

121

146

185

222

280

340

Max. output voltage (V)200〜230V (complies with input voltage) ＊2

Input power source

3 phase 3 wires 200〜230V±10% 50/60Hz±5%

Input power factor ＊3
Input capacity (kVA)＊5
DC Reactor（DCL[Delay] about 0.9[Delay] about 0.7(0.9 ＊4)
2.1

4.1

7.0

）

10.3

9022

14.0

20.5

Option

21.8

33.8

43.6

53.7

69.2

84.6

116

139

1522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

Type
VF64-

1R144 2R244 3R744 5R544 7R544 1144 1544 2244 3044 3744 4544 5544 7544 11044 16044 20044 25044 31544

400V class

Applicable motor capacity(kW) *1

1.1

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

Rated output current (A)

3.1

5.5

9.2

13.0

17.0

24.0

15

22

30

37

45

55

75

110

160

200

250

315

32.5

46.0

62.5

75.5

92.5

111

146

210

300

370

460

600

247

308

385

485

Max. output voltage (V)

380〜460V (complies with input voltage) ＊2

Input power source

3 phase 3 wires 380〜460V±10％ 50／60Hz±5％

Input power factor ＊3
Input capacity (kVA)＊5
DC Reactor（DCL[Delay] about 0.7(0.9 ＊4)
2.1

4.1

7.0

10.3

14.0

[Delay] about 0.9

20.5

28.0

Option

）

32.0

46.1

56.9

69.2

84.6

116

170

2244 3044 3744 4544 5544 7544 11044 16044 20044 25044 31544
Forced air cooling

Cooling system
For the items with * mark 1〜5, see next page.

3-2. Motor rated voltage is 180V・360V
200V class

Type
VF64-

1R122 2R222 3R722 5R522 7R522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

Applicable motor capacity(kW) *1

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

Rated output current (A)

5.5

10.0

17.0

24.0

32.5

46.0

62.5

87.0

121

146

185

222

280

340

Max. output voltage (V)3 phase 3 wires 200〜230V±10％ 50／60Hz±5％

Input power factor ＊3
DC Reactor（DCL

1522

200〜230V (complies with input voltage) ＊2

Input power source
Input capacity (kVA)＊5

1122[Delay] about 0.7(0.9 ＊4)
2.1

2.9

4.4

）

7.4

[Delay] about 0.9

10.8

14.7

Option

21.5

28.0

35.5

45.8

56.5

73

89

122

1522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

Type
VF64-

1R144 2R244 3R744 7R544 1144 1544 2244 3044 3744 4544 5544 7544 11044 16044 20044 25044 31544

400V class

Applicable motor capacity(kW) *1

1.1

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

90

132

160

200

280

Rated output current (A)

3.1

5.5

9.2

17.0

24.0

32.5

46.0

62.5

75.5

92.5

111

146

210

300

370

460

600

214

259

323

404

Max. output voltage (V)

380〜460V (complies with input voltage) ＊2

Input power source

3 phase 3 wires 380〜460V±10％ 50／60Hz±5％

Input power factor ＊3
Input capacity (kVA)＊5
DC Reactor（DCL）[Delay] about 0.7(0.9 ＊4)
2.1

4.1

7.0

10.8

OptionCooling system
For the items with * mark 1〜5, see next page.

115

14.7

[Delay] about 0.9
21.5

28.3

33.6

48.4

60

73

89

146

2244 3044 3744 4544 5544 7544 11044 16044 20044 25044 31544
Forced air coolingChapter 9 Standard specifications

3-3. Large capacity Inverters (parallel units)(1) Motor rated voltage is 200V・400V(2) Motor rated voltage is 180V・360V

116

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

4. Outline dimensions
4-1. Main body4-M5screw orholes for
M5

117

4-M5
screw orholes forM5

4-M6
screw orholes forM6

4-M6
screw orholes forM6

4-M8
screw orholes for
M8

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

fitting hole for 4-M10

fitting hole for 4-M10

118Chapter 9 Standard specifications

119

Chapter 9 Standard specifications

4-2. DC Reactor (Standard・Option)
For the types of VF64-1522 or over in 200V class and VF64-2244 or over in 400V class, DC Reactor of separate installation
is equipped as standard. As to the types of less than these capacities, DC Reactor is optional.

●External form and dimensions
Type A

Type B
Liftingholes
φ20
Terminal
screw

terminal
Detail of earthing partearth seal

fitting hole

Fittingscrew
M6

Fitting screw 4-M4

200V class (hatching part is optional type)
Inverter capacity
VF64-1R122
VF64-2R222
VF64-3R722
VF64-5R522
VF64-7R522
VF64-1122
VF64-1522
VF64-2222
VF64-3022
VF64-3722
VF64-4522
VF64-5522
VF64-7522
VF64-9022

DC Reactor
type
DCL3R722
DCL3R722
DCL3R722
DCL7R522
DCL7R522
DCL1122
DCL1522
DCL2222
DCL3022
DCL3722
DCL4522
DCL5522
DCL7522
DCL9022

Dimension

A
97
97
97
97
97
60
60
60
90
90
110
120
110
135

B
90
90
90
100
100
110
110
110
120
120
125
145
125
135

C
70
70
70
70
70
40
40
40
70
70
90
100
90
115

D
55
55
55
75
75
90
90
90
100
100
105
125
105
115

C
55
55
55
70
70
80
80
40
40
70
70
90
90
115
125
125
135
135

D
62
62
62
70
70
75
75
100
100
100
100
105
105
115
125
125
135
135

E
−
−
−
−
−
48
48
50
75
77
81
107
92
111

（mm）

G
−
−
−
−
−
162
169
182
181
182
170
182
205
215

H
120
120
120
130
130
205
212
226
224
226
214
236
259
279

N
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
40

L
−
−
−
−
−
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
100
100

terminal
M4
M4
M4
M6
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12

N
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
40
40
40
40
40

L
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
90
90
90
90
90
100
100
110
110
120
210

terminal
M3
M3
M3
M4
M4
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M16
M16

Type
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Weight
（kg）
2.1
2.1
2.1
3.3
3.3
4.0
5.0
6.0
10
10
11
15
16
20

400V class (hatching part is optional type)
Inverter capacity
VF64-1R144
VF64-2R244
VF64-3R744
VF64-5R544
VF64-7R544
VF64-1144
VF64-1544
VF64-2244
VF64-3044
VF64-3744
VF64-4544
VF64-5544
VF64-7544
VF64-11044
VF64-16044
VF64-20044
VF64-25044
VF64-31544

DC Reactor
type
DCL3R744
DCL3R744
DCL3R744
DCL7R544
DCL7R544
DCL1544
DCL1544
DCL2244
DCL3044
DCL3744
DCL4544
DCL5544
DCL7544
DCL11044
DCL16044
DCL20044
DCL25044
DCL31544

Dimension

A
78
78
78
97
97
106
106
60
60
90
90
110
110
135
145
145
155
155

B
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
120
120
120
120
125
125
135
145
145
155
155

Cautions on installation
Since DCL becomes hot, do not install near DCL
the device which is influenced by heat. Also,
arrange not to circulate the heat of DCL in thepanel.

E
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
48
48
75
75
90
92
117
124
130
141
142

（mm）

G
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
192
192
195
186
194
209
219
251
256
283
310

H
100
100
100
120
120
150
150
235
235
238
230
248
263
283
325
330
367
389

Type
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Weight
（kg）
1.6
1.6
1.6
3.1
3.1
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.5
10
10
14
16
24
28
35
40
45

Over 20cm
Over 15cm

Over 15cm Over 15cm

Over 15cm

120

Chapter 10 Necessary information to us in the inquiry from customers

Chapter 10 Necessary information to us in the inquiry from customers
In case of order for replacements of the unit and parts in trouble as well as technical question, please be requested to inform us or our distributor of the following items.
1) Type, capacity (kW), input voltage (V) of Inverter.
2) Capacity (kW) and rated speed (min-1) of motor.
3) Control modes : Speed sensorless vector control mode (VF64S)
Vector control mode with speed sensor (VF64V)
V/f control mode (VF64)

4) Serial number, Software version Number (See the label stuck on IC18 of VFC64 P.C.Board).
5) Details of trouble. Situation when trouble occurred.
6) Conditions of use. status of load, ambient conditions, date of purchase, how the Inverter was operated.
7) Name of our distributor.

Request to the distributor
When our Inverter is delivered to customer combining with your equipment, etc., please arrange to deliver this Instruction
Manual also to the end user. If you changed setting values of Inverter from our default values, please arrange to deliverits content to the end user surely.

121http://www.toyodenki.co.jp/
HEAD OFFICE： Tokyo Tatemono Yaesu Bldg, 1-4-16 Yaesu, Chuo-ku,
Tokyo, JapanZIP CODE 103-0028
TEL： +81-3-5202-8132 - 6
FAX： +81-3-5202-8150

Contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

2012-09
ITE042D